UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide (R5.0)

UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide (R5.0)
UC for Enterprise (UCE)
Application Platform
(UNIVERGE OW5000)
Network Application Middleware
Configuration Guide
NEC NEC Corporation
NDA-31085
Revision 3
November 2010
Liability Disclaimer
NEC Corporation reserves the right to change the specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Corporation has prepared this document for the exclusive use of
its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the
property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior
written approval from NEC Corporation.
NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
© 2010 NEC Corporation
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand or product names are or may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services
of, their respective owners.
i
Contents
Introduction
1-1
UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
How This Guide is Organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
OW5000 Configuration
2-1
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Logging into OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Maintaining the OW5000 Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Access Control Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Bridge Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extension Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
License Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Pager Providers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routes/Trunks Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Voice Mail Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-15
2-17
2-23
2-26
2-27
2-42
2-44
2-45
Maintaining the OW5000 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Access Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Message Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Email Notification Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incoming Call Assistant Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Location Status Information Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OAI Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Call Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-48
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-58
2-63
2-65
Maintaining the OW5000 Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Configuring Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Configuring DIDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
ii
Contents
Configuring Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Configuring Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Person Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Configuring Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Configuring Specialities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
User Privileges Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
User Management Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Application Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
IM Archiving Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Adding IM Archiving privileges for a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archiving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-102
2-102
2-104
2-105
2-106
Settings Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
Countries & States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Schedule Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Creating a DBTool Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirmation of Schedule Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Database Backup Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-111
2-116
2-117
2-118
Template Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Exiting OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
WatchDog
3-1
Verifying the WatchDog Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
WatchDog Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Adding a Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting WatchDog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping WatchDog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting WatchDog Helper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Contents
Log Viewer
iii
4-1
Log Viewer Support Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Starting Log Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Log Viewer Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Help Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Application Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Applications Displayed Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Reload App List Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Configure...Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Search Criteria Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Search Results Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Information Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Standard Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Searching for Logged Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Print Log Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Saving Search Results and Working with Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Real-time Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Real-time display of event information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Change Log Level Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Log File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Change Query Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Standard/Real-time Query Configuration Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Query Radio Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max. Number of Results Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real-time Query Radio Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max. Number of Lines Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IM Archive Viewer
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-24
4-25
5-1
Starting IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Using IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Specifying a Search Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Displaying IM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
iv
Contents
Saving IM Logs to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daylight Saving Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyword Searching from IM Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exiting IM Archive Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Operations
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
6-1
OW5000 Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DBTool (Database Import/Export). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
DBTool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Import Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Import Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Calendar Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Export Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Data Mapping Quick Reference Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Database Field Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-1
Integration Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Current State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA4000 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA4000 SQL Server Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Database Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MA4000 Database Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Mapping Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Synchronization Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
PBX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
VoiceMail Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Contents
v
Acronmys and Descriptions
Appendix A-1
Regular Expressions
Appendix B-1
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix C-1
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
Appendix
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
D-1
vi
Contents
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
vii
Figures
Figure
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-28
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-32
2-33
2-34
Title
Page
OW5000 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Control Panel—Administrative Tools—IIS Manager window. . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Web Sites Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Sites Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Sites Window—Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Website Blocked dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Trusted Sites dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
OW5000 Admin Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
New Password Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
OW5000 Administrator Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Trial Period dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
OW5000 Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
SIP Group Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Access Control dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
SIPUA Group—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Group Access Control dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
PBX Access Control dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Conference Server Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Conference Bridges dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Extensions Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Add New Extension dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Range Delete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
URI Format dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
License Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
License Management—Enable Extensions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Licensed Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Pager Providers Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Pager Providers—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
PBX Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
PBX Configuration—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
PBX Configuration—Edit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Delete PBX Configuration Confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Locations Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
viii
Figures
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-42
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-66
2-67
2-68
2-69
2-70
2-71
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-79
Add New Location dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit Location Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Location Confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Code Rule dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Area Code Rule—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX -> PBX Dialing Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Destination PBX dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Source PBX dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved Number dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Reserved Number dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Voice Mail pilot number dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route/Trunk Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route Trunks—Add dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Management dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Port Management dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Server Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Mail Server—Add dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Applications Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server List Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New Access Server dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Info dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server—Routing Rule Info page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Server—Test Routing Rule dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Message Service dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution List dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA General Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA Redirect Configuration dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redirect Configuration—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ICA PBX Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI General Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Message Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LSI Message Settings—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Settings Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OAI Server Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PBX Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCC Setting dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normalization Rules dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Call Control—Normalization Rules dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Call Control—Test Normalization Rule dialog box . . . . . . . . . .
OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category Management dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New Category dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category Added dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Categories dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-36
2-37
2-38
2-39
2-39
2-40
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-47
2-48
2-48
2-50
2-50
2-51
2-52
2-52
2-53
2-55
2-56
2-56
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-63
2-64
2-65
2-66
2-66
2-67
2-69
2-70
2-70
2-71
2-72
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Figures
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-92
2-93
2-94
2-95
2-96
2-97
2-98
2-99
2-100
2-101
2-102
2-103
2-104
2-105
2-106
2-107
2-108
2-109
2-110
2-111
2-112
2-113
2-114
2-115
2-116
2-117
2-118
2-119
2-120
2-121
2-122
2-123
2-124
ix
DID dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
DID Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Manage Custom Fields dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
DID Custom Field dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Location Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Add New Location dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Add Location Phone dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Organizations Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Organization—Add New dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Organization—Add Locations dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Organization—Add Phone Numbers dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Person Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Person Custom Fields dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Full Name Display Format dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Full Name Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
URI Format Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Person Management—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Add Photo dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Roles dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
User Roles—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Employee Roles—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Contact Method dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Select Contact Method—Type dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Contact Methods—Primary Extension dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Address Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Person Range Delete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Position Management dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Position—Add New dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Specialities dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Specialty—Add New dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
User Privilege Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
User Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
IM Archiving Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
IM Archiving Management—Configuration dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
OW5000 General Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
OW5000 Countries & States dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Adding New Country/Region dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
State/Provinces dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Schedule Profile dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
Scheduling (One Time) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Scheduling (Recurring Daily) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Scheduling (Recurring Weekly) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Scheduling (Recurring Monthly) dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Database Backup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
x
Figures
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
History dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Template Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Template Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
OW5000 Version Information dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
WatchDog Helper main window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
WatchDog Helper Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
WatchDog Helper main window toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
WatchDog Helper shortcut menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
WatchDog Helper Add Service dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
WatchDog Helper Delete Service dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
WatchDog Update Item dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connect to OW5000 Log dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Connection Failed dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
OW5000 Log Viewer Main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Viewer Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Log Viewer Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Application Group Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Applications Displayed Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Search Criteria Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Search by Begin Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Filter Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Search Result Display Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Find Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Event Information Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Print Log Query Results dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Log Viewer Shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Add Bookmark dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Selecting a Created Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Application Log Properties dialog box—Applications tab . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Application Log Properties dialog box—Maintenance tab . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Delete Log File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Delete Log File—Backup Copy dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Choose Archive Files dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
IM Archive Viewer Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
IM Information Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
IM Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
DBTool Login dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DBTool Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Data Flow using DBTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Open Profile dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
DBTool Import Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Profile Import Source dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
LDAP Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Figures
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
6-31
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-42
7-1
7-2
7-3
xi
LDAP Server dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Base DN dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Other Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Search Filter dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Example of Import Field Mapping dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Calendar Link Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Calendar Link Extension Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Extension Derivation Rules List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions dialog box . . . . . . . . 6-19
URI Derivation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Assign or Create URIs for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Locations dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Organization dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Person Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Select UniqueId . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Update Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Sync Method 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Sync Method2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
OW5000 Database Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Person Contact Method Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Person URI List dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Person URI Derivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Person URI Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Data Export using DBTool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Open Export Profile dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
DBTool Export Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Export Complete dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Delete Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Delete Options dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Delete Confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
DbTool Profiles Deletion dialog box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Delete Profile Confirmation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Confirmation Display dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
About dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
OW5000 Options—MA4000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
MA4000 Integration Configuration dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Deep Link in MA4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xii
Figures
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xiii
Tables
Table
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
3-1
3-2
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-23
6-24
Title
Page
Icon Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Parameter Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
PBX IP Address Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Region-based PBX Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
IM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
IM archiving Management Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Scheduler Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
DBTool Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
DBTool Process Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
WatchDog Helper main window—columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Main window toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
DBTool Login fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DBTool Import Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Create Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
LDAP Server fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Base DN fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Other Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Search Filter fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Search fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Import Field Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Calendar Link Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Extension Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Extension Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Extension Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
URI Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
URI Derivation fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Location fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Hierarchy Type For Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Location fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Organization/Location Hierarchy fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Person Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Person Contact Method Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Person URI Derivation Icons/Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Profile fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
xiv
Tables
6-25
Exported Data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-26
Export Settings fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-27
Help fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-28
Calendar Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-29
Extension Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-30
License Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-31
Locations Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-32
Organization Type Database Import Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6-33
Organization/Location Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-34
Person Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6-35
Description of Contact Method Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6-36
Route/Trunk Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-37
SIPUA Group Type Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-38
States/Provinces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
7-1
MA4000 to OW5000 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2
MA4000 to OW5000 Integration—Sub-Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3
Fields Mapping—PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-4
Fields Mapping—Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5
Fields Mapping—Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-6
Fields Mapping—VoiceMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-7
Fields Mapping—User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-8
Fields Mapping—Custom Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Appendix B-1Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1
Appendix B-2Normalization Rules (Global Numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-2
Appendix B-3Normalization Rules (Local Numbers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-2
Appendix D-1Configuration Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D-1
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
1-1
1
Introduction
The UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide provides the information
you need to configure the OW5000 and how to operate the OAI Server,
WatchDog, Log Viewer, and Database operation.
The following topics are included in this chapter:
Chapter Topics
• UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview
• How This Guide is Organized
UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide Overview
OW5000 is a collaboration middleware allowing easy application
development in which to communicate with the IP Telephony
environment.
Figure 1-1 OW5000 Applications
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
1-2
Introduction
How This Guide is Organized
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter outlines how to use the manual including the organization
and chapter layout of the UNIVERGE OW5000 Configuration Guide.
Chapter 2
OW5000 Configuration
This chapter describes how to operate the OW5000 Administrator
component of UNIVERGE OW5000. The OW5000 Administrator is used
to configure and maintain settings for OW5000 tools and applications.
Chapter 3
WatchDog
This chapter describes how to operate the WatchDog component of
OW5000. WatchDog is used to restart OW5000 applications when you
have a failure.
Chapter 4
Log Viewer
This chapter describes how to operate the Log Viewer component of
OW5000. Log Viewer is used by administrators to view traces of
information produced by OW5000 applications. This includes errors,
warnings, OAI packets, and debug information.
Chapter 5
IM Archive Viewer
Chapter 6
Database Operations
Chapter 7
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
This chapter describes how to manage the Instant Message archive files.
This chapter describes how to operate the database Import Tools for
OW5000. This utility is employed to import ASCII data into the
database.
This chapter describes how OW5000 will integrate with MA4000. The
fields and entities that are imported from MA4000 to OW5000 and the
rules that are applied are also described.
Appendix A
Acronmys and Descriptions
This appendix describes some of the terms used in this manual.
Appendix B
Regular Expressions
This appendix provides the steps needed to install and uninstall
Microsoft SQL 2008 R2 Express Edition.
Appendix C
Specifications for OW5000
Admin
This chapter lists the specifications for OW5000 Administrator.
Appendix D
OW5000 Administrator
Configuration Specification
This chapter lists the specifications for OW5000 Administrator
Configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-1
2
OW5000 Configuration
OW5000 Administrator is a robust OW5000 tool used to configure
OW5000 applications, PBX configurations, and utilities without using the
Windows registry editor directly. It also provides a graphical user
interface to modify OW5000 user account information, PBX
configurations, and database entries. The functions and associated
screen displays for configuring user account information in OW5000
Administrator are described in this chapter.
Specific OW5000 application configurations performed by OW5000
Administrator can be found in each application's installation guide.
OW5000 Administrator provides a view of application information,
database information, and platform information.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status
Logging into OW5000 Administrator
Maintaining the OW5000 Platform
Maintaining the OW5000 Applications
Maintaining the OW5000 Directory
Application Data Management
Settings Configuration
Schedule Configuration
Template Management
MA4000 Integration
Version Information
Exiting OW5000 Administrator
After changing an OW5000 Configuration, it takes some time before the modification
is available depending on the parameter. Refer to Appendix B for details.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-2
OW5000 Configuration
Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status
Use the following steps to check the availability of Administrator and to
confirm that the Web server and OW5000 application is running.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button and then select Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
A Control Panel—Administrative Tools—IIS Manager window displays
(Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1 Control Panel—Administrative Tools—IIS Manager window
Step 2
Select Web Sites under the (IIS) Manager. A Web Sites Window
displays (Figure 2-2).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-3
Figure 2-2 Web Sites Window
Step 3
If the Default Web Site is not Running, select Start from the right-click
menu.
Microsoft Windows Server 2008
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button and then select Control Panel >
Administrative Tools > Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
Step 2
Select Sites from the (IIS) Manager. Figure 2-3 displays.
Figure 2-3 Sites Window
Step 3
If the Default Web Site is not Started, select Default Web Site and click
Start on the right pane under Manage Web Site(Figure 2-4).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-4
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-4 Sites Window—Start
Logging into OW5000 Administrator
Each time you work with OW5000 Administrator, log in with your
OW5000 login ID and password. If this is the first time you are logging
in to the OW5000 Administrator, use the default login ID admin and the
default password for admin is admin.
When you have finished using the application, you can either log out or
just close your browser.
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button and then select All Programs >
NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform > OW5000 Admin. An OW5000
Admin Login screen displays (Figure 2-7).
If the screen shown in Figure 2-7 does not display, refer to “Verifying the OW5000
Administrator Status” on page 2-2, to confirm that the proper services are running.
REFERENCE
The following security settings for Internet Explorer 6 and 7 are required to use
OW5000 Administrator. The default is Enable for all items.
NOTE
• ActiveX controls and plug-ins - Binary and script behaviors: Enable
• Miscellaneous - Submit non-encrypted form data: Enable
• Scripting - Active scripting: Enable
If you are running Microsoft Windows Server 2003, and you have not added your
OW5000 Server to the Trusted sites zone, a Website Blocked dialog box displays
(Figure 2-5).
IMPORTANT
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-5
Figure 2-5 Website Blocked dialog box
Step 2
Click Add. A Trusted Sites dialog box displays (Figure 2-6).
Figure 2-6 Trusted Sites dialog box
Step 3
Uncheck Require server verification (https:) for all steps in this zone
and then click Add to include this Web site in the Trusted sites zone.
Step 4
Click Close. An OW5000 Administrator Login dialog box displays 
(Figure 2-7).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-6
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-7 OW5000 Admin Login screen
Step 5
Enter your login ID in the Login ID field.
The login ID is admin.
NOTE
Step 6
Enter your password in the Password field.
The password for admin is admin. This password can be changed. Refer to “User
Management Configuration” on page 2-100.
NOTE
Step 7
REFERENCE
Click Login.
If an error message describing a problem connecting to the OW5000 Administrator
Service displays, refer to “Verifying the OW5000 Administrator Status” on page 2-2, to
confirm that the proper services are running.
If there is no activity for 15 minutes (default), the Administrator login page displays
and re-login is required. After login, a pre-configured page displays.
NOTE
After the initial login, you are required to change your password to a strict
password (Figure 2-8).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-7
Figure 2-8 Change Password
Step 8
Enter a new password in the New Password field.The length of the
password must be at least eight characters long and include the
following rules:
—1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
—1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
—1 Digit(1-9)
—1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash,
and single or double quotes)
Step 9
Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field and
click Change Password. Figure 2-9 displays.
Figure 2-9 New Password Login
Step 10 Enter the new password and click Login. Figure 2-10 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-8
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-10 OW5000 Administrator Control Panel
Trial Period
Selecting OW5000 from the OW5000 Administrator Control Panel
displays an OW5000 Options dialog box (Figure 2-12).
After installing the OW5000, almost all of the licenses are available on a
trial basis for 90 days after adding the first extension information in
OW5000 Administrator. The following applies to the trial license.
• The expiration date is displayed beside the OW5000 Administrator
Control Panel (Figure 2-11).
• All trial licenses are inactivated once the expiration date has passed.
• All trial licenses are inactivated once the official license is installed.
Figure 2-11 Trial Period dialog box
Figure 2-12 OW5000 Options dialog box
If your sales region is outside the U.S., Figure 2-12 may look different for your sales
region.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-9
Refer to the following sections for more information on configuring
OW5000.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintaining the OW5000 Platform
Maintaining the OW5000 Applications
Maintaining the OW5000 Directory
Application Data Management
Settings Configuration
Schedule Configuration
Template Management
MA4000 Integration
Version Information
Exiting OW5000 Administrator
The parameters described in OW5000 Administration may be different depending on
your sales region settings.
NOTE
The table below describes icons used in the OW5000 Administrator
(Table 2-1).
Table 2-1 Icon Descriptions
Icons
Description
Edit the current data
Delete the current data
Assign/Update the data without leaving the current page.
Assign/Update the data and continue to assign another entry
without leaving the current page.
Cancel all non-updated data and return to the list page
Assign/Update the date and return to the list page
Sort by ascending order for the parameter
Sort by descending order for the parameter
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-10
OW5000 Configuration
Icons
Description
Sets the display page number/display lines in a page.
Up priority.
Down priority
Do not use the Back, Forward, Refresh button, or the Enter key after logging into
OW5000 Administrator.
NOTE
If an error displays while using OW5000 Administrator, read the information carefully.
If necessary, please go back to the login window and log in again.
NOTE
An asterisk (*) indicates a mandatory parameter.
NOTE
By default, 20 items are listed on one page. This can be increased to a maximum
100 items per page.
NOTE
Only the Version Information page can show a maximum of 600 items.
Maintaining the OW5000 Platform
Selecting Platform from the OW5000 Options dialog box 
(Figure 2-12), displays an OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog box 
(Figure 2-13).
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Access Control Management
Conference Bridge Management
Extension Management
License Management
Configuring the Pager Providers
PBX Configuration
Routes/Trunks Configuration
Serial Ports Configuration
Configuring Voice Mail Servers
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-11
Figure 2-13 OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog box
The parameters described in OW5000 Administration may be different depending on
your sales region settings.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-12
OW5000 Configuration
Access Control Management
Selecting Access Control from the OW5000 Platform Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-13) displays an Access Control dialog box 
(Figure 2-15).
Use this option to configure or add a SIPUA Group, to configure Group
Access Control, and to configure PBX Access Control. This functionality
is available only for the SIP Presence feature. By using this
configuration, the access control of presence can be assigned per SIPUA
group or PBX(Office Code).
An example of SIP Group Access Control is shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 SIP Group Access Control
PBX #2
PBX #1
Office Code : 20
Not belonged
Office Code : 21
PBX #3
Executive
Group
Engineer
Group
Watcher Group
Presentity Group
Access
Engineer Group
Executive Group
Deny
Executive Group
Engineer Group
Allow
• Watcher means the user who refers to the presence of others.
Presentity (Presence Entity) means the user who provides its
presence. As shown in Figure 2-14, the presence of users belonging to
the Executive Group cannot be seen from the Engineer group users.
• All access between each person is available if they are in the same
SIPURI Group.
• If access is set to denied as the Office Code based access control, the
user cannot see the presentity, even if the Group based access control
is set to allow.
• If the terminal does not belong to a group, the terminal accepts
reference from all other terminals.
• If access is set to denied as the Group based access control, the user
cannot see the presentity, even if the Office Code based access control
is set to allow.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-13
• If the terminal does not belong to a group, the terminal accepts
reference from all the other terminals.
• In federation environment, all OW5000 systems should have the
following settings. If not, Access Control may not work correctly.
• Use same SIPUA group name
• Access Control between SIPUA group should be the same
• Do no use PBX Access Control
SIPUA Group
Figure 2-15 Access Control dialog box
Step 1
To add a new SIPUA Group, click Add New Group. A SIPUA
Group—Add New dialog box displays (Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-16 SIPUA Group—Add New dialog box
Step 2
Type the Group Name in the text box.
Step 3
Click the checkbox to select Deny as Default if you do not want to
display the presence of the user who belongs to this group.
Step 4
Click Apply to accept the new group or Cancel to exit without adding a
new group.
Step 5
To edit or delete a SIPUA Group, click the Pencil icon or the
Trashcan
icon. A delete confirmation dialog box displays to confirm
deletion.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-14
OW5000 Configuration
Group Access Control
Selecting Group Access Control from the Access Control dialog box
displays a Group Access Control dialog box (Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-17 Group Access Control dialog box
Step 1
Select the desired radio button to Show Allow List or Show Deny List.
Step 2
To delete a Group Access, click the Trashcan icon next to the desired
group. Confirm the deletion when the dialog box displays. If a watcher
group is deleted in the Allow List, the group moves to the Deny List. If a
watcher group is deleted in the Deny List, the group moves to the Allow
List.
PBX Access Control
Selecting PBX Access Control from the Access Control dialog box
displays a PBX Access Control dialog box (Figure 2-18).
Figure 2-18 PBX Access Control dialog box
Step 1
Select the desired radio button to Show Allow List or Show Deny List.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
2-15
To delete a PBX Access Control, click the Trashcan icon next to the
desired PBX Name (Figure 2-18). Confirm the deletion when the dialog
box displays. If a watcher PBX is deleted which is in the Allow List, the
PBX moves it to the Deny List. If a watcher PBX is deleted which is in
Deny List, the PBX moves it to the Allow List.
Conference Bridge Management
Selecting Conference Bridge from the OW5000 Applications Options
dialog box (Figure 2-13) displays a Conference Bridge Management
dialog box (Figure 2-19).
A conference bridge allows users to conference with more than three
parties. The conference bridges are typically 8 or 16 ports and one caller
can be on each port.
Special Conditions of Conference Server
Please note the conditions below for Conference Server when
programming the PBX to conference with four or more parties.
There are several ways to configure the bridges for conference, but
these are the operations the Conference Manager requires and the
conditions it expects them to work under.
• Do not allow the PBX to move a caller to another port when the port is
busy.
• Turn off the ringback suppression feature of the PA-CFTB conference
card by setting Element 3 to the off position on Switch 1.
If the PBX is programmed for four or more parties to be used for
OW5000 UC Conference Server, the application must be used; it cannot
be done manually. If the bridge is not setup this way, the Conference
Server will not work for a conference of four or more parties. For more
information on how to program the PBX for four or more parties, please
refer to the PBX programming guide for each PBX type.
Follow the steps below to configure Conference Bridges:
Figure 2-19 Conference Server Options dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-16
OW5000 Configuration
Conference Bridges
Step 1
To add a bridge, click Add New Bridge. Step 1 displays.
Figure 2-20 Conference Bridges dialog box
Step 2
Enter the Bridge Name.
Step 3
In the Tenant field, enter the number of the new tenant.
Only one tenant number is allowed per bridge. So, this Tenant number is applied to
all conference bridge ports for this bridge.
NOTE
Step 4
If this conference bridge is used with the UC700 host controlled voice
conference feature, click the check box for Is Host Controlled.
Is Host Controlled parameter displays only when UC700 server is installed
NOTE
Step 5
If there are no ports available, enter the port number and then click Add
Port. All ports for the PBX conference bridge must be configured.
Step 6
Select at least one Pilot number from the assigned ports by clicking the
Set Pilot Number link. The first assigned port is selected as the pilot
number as the default.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to save the changes and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-17
Extension Management
Selecting Extensions from the OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-13) displays an Extensions Management dialog box 
(Figure 2-21).
Figure 2-21 Extensions Management dialog box
From the Extensions page, you can search for an extension, add a new
extension, edit an existing extension, or delete an existing extension. To
sort the columns in ascending or descending order, click the column
headings.
Searching for Extensions
Step 1
Select a PBX from the drop-down list in the Filter field and click Search. 

You can also search by Number by clicking in the drop-down list and
choosing Starts with, Contains, Ends With, or Equals, and then
entering a value in the text box and pressing Search.

Wild card “*” is not required. To display all extensions after you have
filtered them, leave the text box blank and click Search again.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-18
OW5000 Configuration
Adding Extensions
Step 1
To add an extension, click Add New in the Extensions dialog box 
(Figure 2-21). An Add New Extension dialog box displays (Figure 2-22).
Figure 2-22 Add New Extension dialog box
Step 2
Enter the Extension number.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Enter a private number for an IP Centrex environment.
NOTE
Step 3
Select a PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Select the PhoneType from the drop-down list. PhoneType options are
listed below:
—Dterm
—Analog
—Mobility
—PS
—SIMPLE (used for SIMPLE terminal)
—SP30(SIP) (used for SIP protocol softphone)
—VoWLAN (used for MH2XX terminal)
Select Dterm as a Phone Type in the case of a Dterm (Protims Mode, SIP Mode) and
a SP30 (Protims Mode).
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
Select the Tenant number from the drop-down list.
Step 6
Select the Country from the drop-down list.
Step 7
Enter the DID Number.
2-19
Country and DID Number is for the US Market only.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 8
Enter the telURI (used for LCS/OCS Integration only). Refer to the
UNIVERGE OW5000 Installation Guide, OW5000 Remote Call Control
Service, or related documentation for more information.

If the URI format in set in the URI format page, the telURI is generated
automatically by clicking the Auto Input button. 

If the URI format is not configured, nothing displays, even if you click the
Auto Input button.
Step 9
Enter the SIPURI for this extension.
This field is required if you are using the SIP presence feature. It is unique per PBX
and consists of [email protected] name. Normally, XXXX is the same as the extension
number and the domain name must be the same as the name, which is assigned by
the PBX. For example, [email protected]
If the URI format in set in the URI format page, the SIPURI is generated
automatically by clicking the Auto Input button.
If the URI format is not configured, nothing is displayed even if you click
the Auto Input button.
Step 10 Select the SIP Access Server from the drop-down list. Select the proper
Access Server for the SP30 (SIP) and the VoWLAN terminal, and select
Presence Gateway for any other type.
This field is required if you are using the SIP presence feature. If the SIP presence
feature is not required, select Not Assigned.
NOTE
Step 11
Select whether or not Collaboration is enabled for your phone to be a
handset of the Dterm SP30. If this flag is set, the presence for this
terminal is aggregated with the terminal selected from the drop-down list.
Please do not configure when the Microsoft LCS/OCS Integration and
SOAP (Call Control) API is used.
Before setting the Collaboration, the Extension configuration for the handset must
be configured.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-20
OW5000 Configuration
Step 12 Select whether or not this extension Is Monitored by clicking in the
check box.
NOTE
Is Monitored must be checked in the following case:
• Use presence for non SIP terminal
• Get history via OW5000 API (Call Control), OW5000 API (Call Notification), and
OW5000 (Information API)

Refer to the documentation for each OW5000 related application.
Step 13 Enter the number for a subline, then click Add Subline to assign a
subline.
Step 14
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the new extension.
—Click Apply & Add New to save the new extension and keep adding
another extension. (PBX, Phone Type, Tenant, and the SIP Access
Server configuration, used in the previous data, are continuously
displayed.)
—Click Done to save the new extension and return to the list page.
—Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the list page.
If IsMonitored is enabled for an extension that does not exist, it causes extra traffic
between the PBX and the OW5000 system. When the PBX setting is changed,
please update the OW5000 configuration also.
IMPORTANT
Table 2-2 describes the required parameters for each function.
Table 2-2 Parameter Requirements
OW5000 API OW5000 API
OW5000 API
(Call Notifica- (Information
(Call Control)
tion)
API)
LCS/OCS SIP Presence
Integration Configuration
Extension
X
X
X
X
X
PBX
X
X
X
X
X
Phone Type
X
X
X
X
X
Tenant
X
X
X
X
X
Country
X
X
X
X
DID Number
telURI
X
SIPURI
X
SIP Access
Server
X
Collaboration
X
Is Monitored
X
Sublines
X
X
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-21
Note: Is Monitored must be checked in the following case.
-Use presence for non SIP terminal
-Get history via OW5000 API (Call Control), OW5000 API (Call Notification), and OW5000
(Information API). Refer to the documentation for each OW5000 related application.
A subline must be configured only when the call log for subline is required.
NOTE
Editing or Deleting Extensions
Step 1
To edit an extension, click the Pencil
extension (Figure 2-21).
icon next to the desired
Step 2
After making the necessary changes, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the new extension.
—Click Apply & Add New to save the new extension and keep adding
another extension. (PBX, Phone Type, Tenant, and the SIP Access
Server configuration, used in the previous data, are continuously
displayed.)
—Click Done to save the new extension and return to the list page.
—Click Cancel to discard all changes and return to the list page.
Step 3
To Delete an extension, click the Trashcan
extension.
icon next to the desired
Range Delete
Use the following steps to delete a range of extensions.
Step 1
Click Range Delete from the Extension Management dialog box 
(Figure 2-21).
Figure 2-23 Range Delete dialog box
Step 2
Select the PBX and Tenant number from the drop-down list.
Step 3
Enter the Starting Extension and Ending Extension in the text boxes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-22
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
NOTE
Click Delete. Depending on the number of extensions you are deleting,
this may take several seconds or minutes.
A maximum of 500 extensions can be deleted at a time.
During business hour, some extensions may not be deleted if the extension is in use.
In this case, try Range Delete again after business hours.
URI format
Selecting URI Format from Figure 2-21 displays a URI Format dialog box
(Figure 2-24).
Figure 2-24 URI Format dialog box
By configuring this translation rule correctly, telURI and SIPURI can be
created easily using the Auto Input button.
Extension pattern regular expression (for telURI)
Defines the target extension range using the regular expression. Default
is ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$and indicates that all extensions are allowed by
the PBX. Refer to Appendix C for more information on the regular
expression.
Translation pattern regular expression - (for telURI)
Defines the translated pattern (telURI) in this filed. The extension is
treated as $0.
Example of setting:
Extension pattern regular expression: ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$
Translation pattern regular expression: $0:phone-context=nec.com
Extension number: 5000
Translation result of telURI: 5000:phone-context=nec.com
Extension pattern regular expression (for SIPURI)
Translation pattern regular expression - (for SIPURI)
Auto translation configuration for SIPURI. All specifications are the same
as telURI.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-23
License Management
Selecting Licenses from the OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-13) displays a License Management dialog box (Figure 2-25).
Use this option to Enable PBXs, to Enable Extensions, and to display
the Licensed Information.
PBX Configuration and Extension configuration must be done before this license
configuration.
NOTE
For the US, Australian and European markets, you must first configure
the License Manager IP Address and the Port information in the
OW5000 Administrator, on the OW5000 > Settings page, General
Settings tab. Refer to the OW5000 Installation Guide for more details.
Enable PBXs
Follow the steps below to enable PBXs.
Figure 2-25 License Management dialog box
Step 1
Click the Enable PBXs tab to select the desired PBX.
Step 2
To disable a PBX that is enabled, click to remove the check mark.
Step 3
Click Apply.
• If the PBX license is inactivated, the Extensions license belonging to the PBX is
also inactivated.
NOTE
• Installed and Current license is displayed at the top of the Enable PBX dialog box
(Figure 2-26). Ent. license indicates the number of licenses not used by SV8300/
IPS.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-24
OW5000 Configuration
Enable Extensions
Selecting Enable Extensions from Figure 2-25, displays a License
Management—Enable Extensions dialog box (Figure 2-26).
Figure 2-26 License Management—Enable Extensions dialog box
Please note the license type below:
API
Client license. Set for all extensions that are controlled by
the OW5000.
PRESENCE SIP Presence

Refer to the Getting Started Guide.
NOTE
Step 1
Select the PBX from the drop-down menu or enter a PBX name and then
click Search.
Step 2
To enable extensions, click in the desired PBX check box.
Step 3
Click Apply to save the changes.
In Figure 2-26, the Current row displays the number of licenses already assigned.
The Ent. (Enterprise) row displays the licenses, except for those assigned to the
IPS.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-25
Licensed Information
This page displays the current number of licenses in a system and only
the region using License Manager.
Selecting Licensed Information from Figure 2-25, displays 
Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 does not display when Asia is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-27 Licensed Information dialog box
Licenses - This field is sortable.
Total Licenses (PBX) - This field is sortable and indicates the total
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of total licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
Total Licenses (Server) - This field indicates the total number of
licenses assigned to this server. This is assigned at the LMC web page.
Used Licenses (Server) - This field is sortable and indicates the used
licenses in a system using the same PBX as the LMS host PBX. For
example, if three OW5000 servers are connected with the same LMC, all
administrators can see the same number of used licenses from the
Admin License Management page.
X Record - This sets the maximum record on a page.
X Page - This sets the target page to be displayed.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-26
OW5000 Configuration
Configuring the Pager Providers
The Pager Providers option allows a user to receive a real page on
their pager. Each provider has their own settings in order to contact
their subscribers. Use the steps below to setup Provider information:
Step 1
Select Pager Providers from the OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-13). A Pager Providers Management dialog box displays
(Figure 2-28).
Displays only when the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-28 Pager Providers Management dialog box
Step 2
Click Add New Pager Provider. A Pager Provider—Add New dialog box
displays (Figure 2-29).
Figure 2-29 Pager Providers—Add New dialog box

E
Step 3
Enter the Name of the Provider (required).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
NOTE
2-27
Enter the number in the TAP Dialup (1-Way) field.
If you use TAP (Telocator Alphanumeric Protocol), either a customer provided TAP
Server must be attached to the OW5000 Server via a serial connection; or a modem
attached to a serial port is needed. Using either option, a serial port must be
configured.
Step 5
Enter the SNPP Host Name.
Step 6
Enter the Port (Number).
Step 7
Enter the Max Length.
Step 8
Click Apply to save the information and then click Done to close the
dialog box, or click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Step 9
To Edit or Delete a Provider, click the Pencil
or Trashcan
icon.
PBX Configuration
Selecting PBXs from the OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-13) displays a PBX Management dialog box (Figure 2-30). If
PBXs have previously been added, a list of all configured PBXs displays.
Figure 2-30 PBX Management dialog box
The PBX Management dialog box allows you to add, edit, or delete
PBX Settings, Locations, Area Code Rules, PBX to PBX Dialing, and
Reserved Numbers.
The PBX must be configured based on the following rules:
• Assign per PBX in the case of the CCIS network
• Assign only one PBX (OAI node) for a fusion network environment
(non IP Centrex)
• Assign per UGN for an IP Centrex environment, even a fusion network
environment
• Assign only one PBX (OAI node) in the case of a LCS/OCS integration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-28
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a PBX Configuration
Clicking Add New PBX from the PBX Management dialog box displays a
PBX Configuration—Add New dialog box (Figure 2-31).
Figure 2-31 PBX Configuration—Add New dialog box
PBX Settings
When adding a new PBX Configuration, the first dialog box to display is
PBX Settings.
Step 1
Enter a Name for the PBX in the PBX Name field. This is a label used to
identify the PBX. It is displayed in various list boxes to identify the
location of extensions, and therefore should most likely be made to
describe the site where it is located. Once the PBX name is saved, it
cannot be changed.
Step 2
Enter the IP address of the PBX in the IP Address field (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
If you do not know the PBX IP address, contact your local PBX system
administrator. Determining the IP address of your PBX depends on the
particular type of PBX selected, as shown in (Table 2-3). If you are using
a NetFusing system, enter the IP Address where IP (OAI Interface
Processor) is enabled.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-29
Table 2-3 PBX IP Address Locations
PBX Type
IP Address Location
NEAX 2000 IPS
CM0B00
NEAX 2400 IMS - Internal
ADTM command
NEAX 2400 IPX
ADTM command
SV7000
ADTM command (TP server address)
SV7000 MPS
ADTM command
UNIVERGE SV8300
CM0B00
UNIVERGE SV8500
ADTM (LAN2:default)
Table 2-4 Region-based PBX Name
Japan
United States
UNIVERGE
UNIVERGE SV7000 SV7000
Europe
Asia (other)
UNIVERGE
SV7000
UNIVERGE
SV7000
--
UNIVERGE
SV7000 MPS
UNIVERGE
SV7000 MPS
--
UNIVERGE NEAX UNIVERGE NEAX
2400 IPX
2400 IPX
UNIVERGE
SV7000
UNIVERGE SV7000 UNIVERGE
TypeSS
SV7000 MPS
Australia
UNIVERGE
APEX7600i
UNIVERGE NEAX
2400 IPX
UNIVERGE
APEX3600i
UNIVERGE NEAX UNIVERGE NEAX UNIVERGE NEAX UNIVERGE NEAX
2000 IPS
2000 IPS
2000 IPS
2000 IPS
NEAX 2400 IMS Internal
UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300 UNIVERGE SV8300
UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500 UNIVERGE SV8500
Step 3
Enter the PBX ID for the PBX in the Office Code (PBX Id) field. This is
the PBX’s office code. This ID is used by applications to match
extensions provided in OAI messages sent from the PBX with a given
extension in the OW5000 Database. This ID uniquely identifies the PBX
and is critical in a CCIS environment that does not have a unique
numbering plan (where extensions can have the same number in more
than one networked PBX). If you are using a Stand-alone system, 1 is
recommended as the Office Code.
Step 4
Select an available Client/Server Port from the drop-down list. This port
is used by remote applications to communicate with the OAI Server
using TCP/IP. Choose a value in the range 44000-44099, that does not
conflict with other programs or configured PBX's using that value. It is
possible to type 'netstat -a -n' from a DOS command prompt to see ports
already in use.
Step 5
Select the PBX Type from one of the options in the PBX Type drop-down
list. It is important to select the correct type because applications rely on
this information for both licensing and functionality.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-30
OW5000 Configuration
Step 6
Select the Split Call Forward check box if this feature is configured on
your PBX. Split Call Forwarding enables Dterm telephone users to set
different call forwarding patterns for internal versus external calls.
Step 7
Select a Location from the drop-down list. The location must be
configured before this step. For more information, see “Locations” on
page 2-32.
Step 8
Select the proper Pbx Reconnect Delay time from the drop-down list.
This parameter is a delay timer and determines how much time should
pass until the next reconnect request is sent to the PBX when the
OW5000 realizes a disconnection between the server and the PBX.
Default value is 30 seconds.
Step 9
Select the proper Heartbeat Timeout value from the drop-down list. This
is a parameter which indicates the heartbeat timeout between the server
and the PBX. Default value is 128 seconds.
Step 10 Check the UGN (User Group Number) if the IP centrex feature is used.
Step 11
Enter the Prefix number. This parameter typically consists of Access
Number + Office Code (PBX ID). This parameter is mandatory in multiPBX systems to identify the same extension number. This parameter is
not required for a closed network system.
Step 12 Enter the SIP Server IP Address (Port). The IP Address of SP must be
assigned in this edit box for SV7000 and SR-MGC. Enter the SIP-BOX
IP address for the IPX and IPS. All SIP Server IP addresses must be
entered if there is more than one SIP Server. In the VRRP environment,
both physical and logical IP addresses must be entered. The Default Port
number is 5060 for SP. Set Act side IP Address of LAN1 for SV8500
system. Set 3 IP Addresses (Act type,type 0 and 1) of IP Address for a
redundancy system.
Step 13 Click Add to add a port, or Remove to remove a port.
UGN, Prefix, and SIP Server IP Address (Port) fields are needed for the SIP
Presence function.
NOTE
Step 14 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to add the PBX Configuration and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the new PBX configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-31
Editing PBX Configurations
Use the following steps to edit an existing PBX configuration.
Step 1
Click the Pencil
icon next to the desired PBX configuration 
(Figure 2-30). A PBX Configuration—Edit dialog box displays 
(Figure 2-32).
Figure 2-32 PBX Configuration—Edit dialog box
Step 2
The PBX Name is displayed for informational purposes only and cannot
be changed because it is a unique identifier for the PBX.
Step 3
After changing the parameter, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to add the PBX Configuration changes and close the
dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
NOTE
If the UGN (User Group Number) is set with the same SIP Server which has the
same IP Address for multiple PBXs having the same IP Address, the IP Address for
the PBX cannot be changed. To change the IP Address, delete all IP addresses of
the SIP Server IP Address and then change the PBX IP Address.
Deleting PBX Configurations
Use the following steps to delete an existing PBX configuration.
Step 1
Click the Trashcan icon next to the PBX configuration you wish to
delete (Figure 2-30). A Delete PBX Configuration Confirmation dialog
box displays (Figure 2-33).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-32
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-33 Delete PBX Configuration Confirmation dialog box
Step 2
Do one of the following:
—Click OK to delete the configuration.
—Click Cancel to close the dialog box without deleting the PBX
configuration.
Locations
Locations must be configured for each PBX if outbound dialing and
inbound parsing of numbers is to work correctly.
Location is used only for OW5000 API (Call Control) and LCS/OCS Integration.
NOTE
Adding Locations
Use the following steps to add a Location for a given PBX.
Step 1
Click the Locations tab to display a Locations Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-34).
Figure 2-34 Locations Configuration dialog box
Step 2
Click Add New Location. An Add New Location dialog box displays
(Figure 2-35).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-33
Figure 2-35 Add New Location dialog box
Step 3
Enter a descriptive identifier for the location in the Location Name field.
This is a label used to identify this Location configuration and its
associated dialing rules. It is viewable on various list boxes to identify the
location associated with this PBX, and it is selectable for other PBXs
sharing the same dialing properties for this geographic area. Enter
something descriptive such as the city name that will allow yourself and
other administrators to infer associated rules for this locale.
Step 4
Enter the Country Code for this location in the Country Code field. This
value will be used when deciding whether or not a called destination is in
the same country. Called destinations outside the configured country will
be dialed as: long distance access code + international direct dial code +
country code + number or E.164 format. E.164 format is used for LCS/
OCS integration and OW5000 API (Call Control) makeCallWithDialNum
method (dialAsIs=false).
Step 5
Enter the City/Area Code used by the PBX in the City/Area Code field.
This value will be used when deciding whether or not a called destination
is local or long distance. By default, called numbers within the same city/
area code will NOT have the city/area code inserted between the local
access code and the number to dial unless a City/Area Code rule has
been defined to change this behavior. Also by default, called numbers to
destinations with different city/area codes will automatically have the
national direct dial code inserted between the long distance access code
and the number unless a separate City/Area Code rule has been defined
to prevent this.
Step 6
Enter the PBX access code needed to dial Long Distance from the PBX
in the Long Dist Access Code field. Long distance is defined in
OW5000 as calls to city/area codes different than the city/area code of
the location for the calling extension. The national direct dial code will
automatically be inserted after the Long Dist Access Code prior to the
city/area code, so it is not necessary to enter the national direct dial code
as part of the Long Dist Access Code. If this PBX is in a metropolitan
area with multiple city/area codes that should not be treated as long
distance, use a City/Area Code Rule to differentiate other local city/area
codes so the national direct dial code will not be inserted after the Local
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-34
OW5000 Configuration
Access Code (note that the Local Access Code is used in place of the
Long Distance Access Code in this instance).
Step 7
Enter the PBX access code needed to dial local calls from the PBX in the
Local Access Code field. This should include the code to dial out of the
PBX along with any digits that are required to place local calls by the
local carrier and/or central office switch.
Step 8
Enter the direct dial code for dialing international numbers in the Int.
Direct Dial Code field. This is the code required to dial an international
number, which will be inserted between the long distance access code
and the country code. If you are not making an international call with an
E.164 format, configuration is not needed.
Step 9
Enter the direct dial code for dialing numbers inside the country but
outside the current city/area code in the National Code field. This code
will be inserted between the long distance access code and the city/area
code.
Step 10 After the Location is saved, assign the location to the PBX in the PBX
Setting page and do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the Location
—Click Done to add the Location and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Editing Locations
Use the following steps to edit Locations of configured PBXs using this
location and the associated area code rules.
Step 1
Select the PBX Configuration from those listed in the Locations
Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-34) and click the Pencil icon. An
Edit Location Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 2-36).
Figure 2-36 Edit Location Configuration dialog box
Step 2
After changing the configuration, do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-35
Deleting Locations
Use the following steps to permanently delete a Location so that it may
not be reselected by this PBX or other PBXs.
NOTE
A location can only be deleted if it is not used by other PBXs. If it is currently in use
by other PBXs, these other PBX configurations must first be modified to use a
different location or no location before this location and its associated area code
rules can be deleted.
Step 1
Select the desired location from the Locations Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-34).
Step 2
Once the desired Location is selected, click the Trashcan icon. A
Delete Location Confirmation dialog box displays (Figure 2-37)
Figure 2-37 Delete Location Confirmation dialog box
Step 3
Click OK to delete this location or Cancel to exit the dialog box and keep
this location configuration.
Area Code Rules
If special rules exist for this location; such as requiring dialed numbers
to the same city/area code have the city/area code inserted (10 digit
dialing in United States), treating numbers with a different city/area
code as local, or treating certain numbers within the same city/area
code as long distance, click AreaCode Rules from the PBX
Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-31). An Area Code Rule dialog box
displays (Figure 2-38).

Without special rules, OW5000 will assume dialed numbers to the same
city/area code as the location are local, and dial the local access code
plus the number (with city/area code removed). Calls to numbers
outside the given city/area code are treated as long distance such that
the Long Dist Access Code is dialed followed by the national direct dial
code + area code and phone number. You will be prompted to save the
changes you have made thus far for the Location before proceeding.
The Area Code Rule is used for OW5000 API (Call Control) and LCS/OCS
Integration only.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-36
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-38 Area Code Rule dialog box
Step 1
To add a rule, click Add New Area Code Rule. An Area Code
Rule dialog box displays (Figure 2-39).
Figure 2-39 Area Code Rule—Add New dialog box
Step 2
In the Target City/Area Code field, enter the area code that should have
a special rule when dialed. This field is required.
Step 3
If a specific exchange within the target city/area code requires a special
dialing rule, enter this number in the Target Exchange field. For
example, if most numbers within the 214 area code are considered local,
but a number such as (214) 335-1234 is long distance, enter “335” for
the target exchange. If this rule applies to all exchanges within the city/
area code (as can be the case for 10-digit dialing), leave this field blank.
Step 4
If the rule you are adding requires a direct dial code access code to be
added between the local or long distance access code for this location
and the number to dial, enter this code in the Direct Dial Code field. If no
special digits are required, leave this field blank. The Local or Long
Distance Access Code for the location will always be dialed regardless of
the value in this field, so do not include these as part of the Direct Dial
Code.
Step 5
If the target city/area code is to be inserted when dialing this area code,
check the box Include City/Area Code. This box is needed to specify
10-digit dialing for local calls in United States.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 6
2-37
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the area code without exiting the dialog box.
—Click Done to save the Area Code Rule and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the Area Code Rule.
Area Code Rule is used for OW5000 (Call Control API) and LCS/OCS Integration
only.
NOTE
PBX to PBX Dialing
If you have an environment with multiple PBXs using a non-unique
numbering plan, if you require inserting an access code in front of an
extension before dialing, or if you receive an access code together with
the calling party's extension, you must specify the rules needed by
OW5000 to build up dialable strings and break apart incoming numbers
into their core components of PBX and extension. Using these rules,
OW5000 knows how to dial from one PBX to another when access codes
must be used, and it knows how to interpret what part of an incoming
number is the actual extension when an office or access code is received
before the extension.
PBX to PBX Dialing is used for multiple PBXs environment of OW5000 (Call Control
API) and LCS/OCS Integration feature.
NOTE
Step 1
Click PBX -> PBX Dialing from the PBX Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-29). A PBX > PBX Dialing Configuration dialog box displays
(Figure 2-40).
Figure 2-40 PBX -> PBX Dialing Configuration dialog box
The Destination PBX section describes how various PBXs in the CCIS
network may be dialed by the current PBX. The Destination PBX is
identified along with the prefix needed to be inserted before the
extension. It may be necessary to specify the first digit of the extension
range if the destination PBX has extensions of varying lengths. For
example, a PBX may require dialing ‘8782’ before four digit extensions
beginning with ‘3’, but ‘78’ before five digit extensions beginning with
‘2’. In the case of four digit extensions, the ‘2’ belongs to the access
code, but in the case of five digit extensions, the ‘2’ is part of the
extension. Using these tables, you can identify these types of conditions
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-38
OW5000 Configuration
so that OW5000 can properly dial and interpret incoming numbers
across the CCIS network.
The Source PBX section describes how incoming numbers from these
source PBXs to the current PBX should be disassembled to find the
actual extension of the calling party. This is done by entering the
Incoming Prefix that should be removed to find the extension. It is
possible to have more than one entry per source PBX in case numbers
can arrive in various formats from this PBX.
A Prefix is not required for the PBX(UGN), which uses the IP Centrex Feature,
because the Extension has its prefix as part of the extension number.
NOTE
Step 2
To add a new Destination PBX, click Add New Destination PBX. An
Add Destination PBX dialog box displays (Figure 2-41).
Figure 2-41 Add Destination PBX dialog box
Step 3
Select the desired Destination PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Enter the Dialing Prefix number.
Step 5
Enter the Extensions Beginning with number in the text field. This
parameter is used only when different access codes need to be applied
for each beginning number. This configuration is not often required.
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Destination PBX without exiting the dialog
box.
—Click Done to save the Destination PBX and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the Destination
PBX.
Step 7
To add a new Source PBX, click Add New Source PBX. An Add Source
PBX dialog box displays (Figure 2-42).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-39
Figure 2-42 Add Source PBX dialog box
Step 8
Select the desired Source PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 9
Enter the Incoming Prefix in the text box. An Incoming Prefix must be
configured for each PBX, including its own PBX.
A Prefix must be set when the current PBX and the Source PBX are the same.
NOTE
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Source PBX without exiting the dialog box.
—Click Done to save the Source PBX and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the Source PBX.
Step 11
To modify a Destination or Source PBX, select the desired PBX and then
click the Pencil
icon and make the necessary changes.
Step 12 To delete a Destination or Source PBX, select the desired PBX and then
click the Trashcan
icon.
Reserved Numbers
Selecting the Reserved Numbers option from the PBX Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-31) displays a Reserved Number dialog box (Figure 2-43). This option
allows you to add or edit one or more Dterms that can serve as a shared pool for
applications requiring temporary use of a Dterm for complex call processing
scenarios.
Figure 2-43 Reserved Number dialog box
Step 1
Click Add New Monitored Number to add new Reserved Numbers. An
Add Reserved Number dialog box displays (Figure 2-44).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-40
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-44 Add Reserved Number dialog box
Step 2
Enter the number to reserve in the Number field.
Enter a private number for an IP centrex environment.
NOTE
Step 3
Select the Tenant from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Select one of the Reserved Type options from the drop-down list. 

Dummy DTerm Number - it is only necessary to allocate Dummy
Dterms if you are so instructed by an application installation. This is not
required unless United States is selected as the Sales Region.

Monitored Numbers... to enter one or more monitored numbers (AMNO
assigned on the NEAX 2400) that can serve as a shared pool for
applications requiring monitored numbers. It is only necessary to allocate
Monitored Numbers if you will be running an application such as the
UNIVERGE UA5200, which requires such numbers in its configuration. 

Monitored Numbers are mandatory for LCS/OCS Integration.
Step 5
Choose the Application from the drop-down list.

OW5000API must be assigned for LCS/OCS integration. The ACD,
Incoming Call Assistant, Location Status and the Oai Server are not used
if only the OW5000 platform is used.
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Reserved number without exiting the dialog
box. Click Apply & Add New to save the Reserved Number; the
Extension is increased automatically.
—Click Done to save the Reserved number and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the Reserved
Number.
Step 7
To Edit existing numbers, click the Pencil
icon.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 8
To delete a Reserved Number, click the Trashcan
2-41
icon.
Be sure to change or delete the related configuration before deleting a reserved
number.
IMPORTANT
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers
Step 1
Selecting the Voice Mail Pilot Numbers option from the PBX
Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-13) displays a Voice Mail Pilot
Numbers dialog box (Figure 2-45). This option allows you to add or edit
one or more Voice Mail pilot numbers; which is used for voice mail
integration, such as UM8500.
Figure 2-45 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-45 Voice Mail Pilot Numbers dialog box
Step 2
Click Add New Pilot Number to add a new Voice Mail pilot number. An
Add Voice Mail pilot number dialog box displays (Figure 2-46).
Figure 2-46 Add Voice Mail pilot number dialog box
Step 3
Enter the pilot number to reserve in the Pilot Number field.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the Voice Mail pilot number without exiting the
dialog box.
—Click Done to save the Voice Mail pilot number and exit the dialog
box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the Voice Mail pilot
number.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-42
OW5000 Configuration
Step 5
To change the default Voice Mail pilot number, click Set Default of the
proper pilot number. The Default pilot number is displayed as bold. This
number is used when a client does not specify the Voice Mail pilot
number.
Step 6
To delete a Voice Mail Pilot Number, click the Trashcan
icon.
Routes/Trunks Configuration
Selecting Routes/Trunks from the OW5000 Platform Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-13), displays a Route/Trunk Management dialog
box (Figure 2-47).
Figure 2-47 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-47 Route/Trunk Management dialog box
Use the following steps to add, edit, or delete a Route Trunk:
Adding a Route Trunk
Step 1
Click Add New Trunk from the Route Trunks dialog box. A Route
Trunks—Add dialog box displays (Figure 2-48).
Figure 2-48 Route Trunks—Add dialog box
Step 2
Enter the number for this trunk in the Route Number field.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Enter the Name associated with this trunk number.
Step 4
Enter the Beginning Trunk and the Ending Trunk number.
Step 5
Select the PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 6
Select the Tenant Number from the drop-down list.
Step 7
Enter the desired number in the four UserDefined fields.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-43
2-44
OW5000 Configuration
Step 8
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information without closing the dialog box.
—Click Done to save the record and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving the record.
Step 9
Click the Pencil
or Trashcan
icon to edit or delete a Route/Trunk.
Serial Ports Configuration
Selecting Serial Ports from the OW5000 Platform Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-13), displays a Serial Port Management dialog box 
(Figure 2-49).
Figure 2-49 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-49 Serial Port Management dialog box
Step 1
To add a serial port, click Add New Serial Port. A Serial Port
Management dialog box (Figure 2-49).
Figure 2-50 Serial Port Management dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
2-45
Enter the information in the following fields:
—Serial Port
—Baud Rate
—DataBits ID
—Parity
—Stop Bits
—Flow Control
Select the HardWare Flow Control option for TAP page support.
TIP
Step 3
To edit or delete a serial port, select the Pencil
icon.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
icon or the Trashcan
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Configuring Voice Mail Servers
Selecting Voice Mail Servers from the OW5000 Platform Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-13) displays a Voice Mail Server Management
dialog box (Figure 2-51).
Figure 2-51 displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Figure 2-51 Voice Mail Server Management dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-46
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a Voice Mail Server
Step 1
Click Add New Voice Mail Server. A Voice Mail Server—Add dialog box
displays (Figure 2-52).
Figure 2-52 Voice Mail Server—Add dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Enter the Name for the Voice Mail Server.
Step 3
Select the Type from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Enter the System ID. (optional)
Step 5
Enter the Base URL for the Voice Mail Server.
Step 6
To edit or delete a Voice Mail Server, click the Pencil
icon.
or Trashcan
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-47
Maintaining the OW5000 Applications
OW5000 Applications are installed as part of the OW5000 platform in most cases.
Each module supports a specific feature such as SIP Presence, and LCS/OCS
Integration. Selecting Applications from the OW5000 Options dialog box
(Figure 2-12), displays an OW5000 Applications Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-53).
Figure 2-53 OW5000 Applications Configuration dialog box
Figure 2-53 is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Access Server Configuration
Application Message Service Configuration
Email Notification Configuration
Incoming Call Assistant Configuration
Location Status Information Configuration
OAI Server Configuration
Remote Call Control Configuration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-48
OW5000 Configuration
Access Server Configuration
Selecting Access Server from the OW5000 Applications Options dialog
box (Figure 2-53) displays an Access Server List Manager dialog box 
(Figure 2-54). Follow the steps below to add, edit, or delete an access
server.
One PSGW (Presence Gateway) and more than one Access Server
configuration is required for the SIP presence feature.
PSGW is set as the default. Do not delete this configuration. (Port 6061 is assigned)
NOTE
Figure 2-54 Access Server List Manager dialog box
Adding an Access Server
Step 1
Clicking Add New Access Server from Figure 2-54 displays an Add
New Access Server dialog box (Figure 2-55).
Figure 2-55 Add New Access Server dialog box
Step 2
Enter the Server Name. This name is used as a unique ID. Once the
Access Server is defined, you cannot change the Server Name. The
values in Step 3 to Step 9 do not have to be changed from the default of
the parameter is not in conflict with another application.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-49
Step 3
Enter the IP Address for the server. Use the same address as where the
OW5000 Platform is installed. Only one Access Server can be assigned
per server.
Step 4
Enter the Listen Port number of the Access Server. (accepts 1025 to
65535 only.) Default is 6060. A Listen Port is not required for PSGW.
Only one Access Server is available (except PSGW) per server.
NOTE
Step 5
Enter the listen port in the Legacy Port field. Accepts 1025 to 65535
only. Default is 60002. This parameter is not used for OW5000 R4.
(Future use).
Step 6
Enter the RPC Listen Port number. If PSGW is checked, this value is
not required. Accepts 1025 to 65535 only. Default is 62000.
Step 7
Enter the TOS value. This field accepts HEX only, but 0x is not needed.
Default is 00. This value can be changed. Only Access Server works on
the Microsoft Windows Server 2003. To enable this configuration,
change the registry modification as shown below.

Based on the following URL, add a registry key named
"DisableUserTOSSetting" under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Tcpip\
Parameters then set 0.

http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/magazine/2007.02.cableguy.aspx
Step 8
Enter the Keep Alive interval (in seconds). Default is 1800.
Step 9
Enter the Timer T1 Value (in milliseconds) which means the first retry
timer of the SIP request packet from the Access Server to the terminals.
Default is 500 milliseconds. Usually no configuration change is required.
Step 10 Check Is PSGW if the server is PSGW. PSGW can only be installed on
the same box as the OW5000 Platform. OW5000 Platform installer
automatically creates the PSGW configuration (PSGWlocal). The
PSGWlocal settings do not need editing unless this configuration is
deleted accidently.
Step 11
Select the Binding Type from the drop-down list. Available options are
Named Pipe, TCP/IP, and HTTP. If PSGW is not checked, this value is
disabled. Only TCP/IP is available for this version.
Step 12 After changing the configuration, do one of following:
—Click Apply to save the Access Server information.
—Click Done to save the Access Server information and close the dialog
box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 13 To edit Access Server, click the Pencil icon on the Access Server List
Manager dialog box (Figure 2-54).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-50
OW5000 Configuration
Step 14 To delete Access Server, click the Trashcan icon on the Access Server
List Manager dialog box (Figure 2-54).
If the Server Name or IP address is duplicated in the database, an error message
displays.
NOTE
Routing Info
Selecting the Routing Info option from the Access Server dialog box
(Figure 2-54) displays a Routing Info dialog box (Figure 2-56). This
option allows you to add or edit a routing rule which is used for SIP
presence federation. Multiple routing rules can be assigned. The
OW5000 system checks the routing based on priority (the first line is the
highest priority).
Figure 2-56 Routing Info dialog box
Adding a Routing Rule
Clicking Add New Routing Rule from the Access Server dialog box
displays an Access Server—Routing Rule Info page (Figure 2-57).
Figure 2-57 Access Server—Routing Rule Info page
Routing Info
Use the information below to add a new Routing Rule.
Step 1
Enter a regular expression of the target SIPURI in the Routing Rule
field. Configuration examples are listed below:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-51
Step 2
Enter the translation format in the Translation Pattern field. $1 must be
there in this filed. Refer to Appendix C for details on the Regular
Expression.
Step 3
Enter the target access server in the IP Address field. This Access
Server belongs to a different OW5000 system so the Access Server
name is not available.
Step 4
Enter the target access server port number in the Port field.
Example1:
Routing Rule: ^710([0-9*#]{5})@.+$
(SIPURI start from 710 and 5 digits (total 8 digits) before @ mark and
store that 5 digits as $1)
Translation Pattern: [email protected]m
IP Address: 192.168.0.10
Port: 5060
Input SIPURI: [email protected]
Result:
[email protected] is sent to 192.168.0.10 port 5060 using TCP session.
Testing a Routing Rule
Clicking Test Routing Rule from the Access Server dialog box displays
an Access Server—Test Routing Rule dialog box (Figure 2-58). The Test
Routing Rule button is displayed when more than one Routing Rule is
assigned.
Figure 2-58 Access Server—Test Routing Rule dialog box
This page provides test functionality for a routing rule.
Step 1
Enter the test SIPURI in the Test Routing Rule field and then click Test.

If a matching routing rule is found in the system, the routing rule and
target information displays on this page. 

If a matching rule is not found in the system, the Routing Rule Info field is
blank and an error box displays. The rule is checked from the top routing
rule so if multiple rules are matched for the test value, the highest priority
rule displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-52
OW5000 Configuration
Application Message Service Configuration
Selecting Application Message Service from the OW5000 Applications
Options dialog box (Figure 2-53) displays an Application Message
Service dialog box (Figure 2-59).
Figure 2-59 Application Message Service dialog box
Step 1
Enter the TCP Service Port for the application message and then click
Apply. Default port is 5425.
Email Notification Configuration
Selecting Email Notification from the OW5000 Applications Options
dialog box (Figure 2-53) displays a Distribution List dialog box 
(Figure 2-60). This configuration is available only when the appropriate
service is installed.
Figure 2-60 Distribution List dialog box
In the Available Applications drop-down list, there will be
<<None>> if only the OW5000 platform is installed.
Refer to each application's documentation for more details.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-53
Incoming Call Assistant Configuration
The following options are originally configured during the OW5000
Platform installation. They may be reconfigured through OW5000
Administrator by completing the steps below.
Step 1
Login to the OW5000 Administrator program. Once you are logged into
OW5000 Administrator, follow this path to open the ICA configuration
options: OW5000 > Applications > Incoming Call Assistant. An ICA
General Settings dialog box displays (Figure 2-61).
Figure 2-61 ICA General Settings dialog box
Step 2
Enter information in the following fields for Server Settings.
—Legacy TCP/IP Port
The TCP/IP Port is the port number used by external applications to
connect to the LSI Service. The default number (5424) need only be
changed if the external applications cannot connect to the ICA Service
due to a conflict with other programs on the OW5000 Server already
using this port.
Step 3
Review the Options information.
—Name Display Enabled in PBX
If your PBX is currently configured to use the built-in Name Display
Feature, check the box Name Display Enabled in PBX. This ensures
that ICA will not display redundant information about calling
employees that the PBX is already displaying to your Dterm.
When checked, ICA will not display a caller's name if the caller is an
employee, and they are calling your prime line. External numbers to
your prime line will still be displayed by ICA as well as all calls to your
sublines, employee included. Also, ICA will not show a called
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-54
OW5000 Configuration
employee's name on placed calls. If the call you are placing is to a
non-employee number, ICA will display the dialed number or name.
If Name Display Enabled in PBX is not checked, ICA will always
attempt to reconcile the caller or called party number to names in the
employee, external, or personal directories and display this
information on your Dterm, with one exception. If you are placing a call
to an employee who has set their status through the Location Status
application (LSI), and LSI is configured to flash the status to your
phone, ICA does not display the employee name. Instead, it gives
control to LSI so that you can see the person's status, return date,
time, and alternate number, if any.
—Show External Number
If this item is checked, ICA will always display the ANI information for
an external call unless a name match is found. If a name match is
found, ICA will display the name. If this item is not checked, ICA will
only display a name if a name is found, or if the incoming line is a sub
line. Otherwise, nothing is displayed.
—Show DID Information
Select this check box to configure ICA to show the name of the called
number as it is found in the OW5000 DID (Direct Inward Dial)
Database. This DID number must be configured as a virtual number in
the PBX and all calls forwarded to the user's extension. This box is
typically NOT selected in order to always show the caller's ANI
instead.
—Password Required
Select this check box to require users to enter a password when
accessing Incoming Call Assistant.
NOTE
If this check box is not selected, the user will be allowed to choose not to use a
password when accessing Incoming Call Assistant. If the check box is selected, they
will be required to enter a password before they can access Incoming Call Assistant.
—Chime on Incoming Call to Subline
If your PBX is configured so that incoming calls to sublines do not ring,
you may desire to check this box so that ICA users are alerted with a
Dterm chime when receiving an incoming call on one of their sublines.
—Outbound Call Log Size
Specifies the number of records that will be stored for each user's
outbound call history. This value also affects other applications that
view the history.
—Inbound Call Log Size
Specifies the number of records that will be stored for each user's
inbound call history. This value also affects other applications that view
the history.
—Max Idle Time (seconds)
Specifies the number of seconds that ICA waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
2-55
In the Name Display Format for Employee Match section, select one
of the following ways to display employee names from the drop-down list.
—Employee Display Name
—Last,First
—First Last
This option allows the user to select how names are displayed on the
Dterm when ICA finds an employee match to an incoming or outgoing
call. This name can be the display name, which is configured in the
OW5000 Administrator for that employee, or it can be a combination of
first and last name. If “last, first” or “first last” are selected and either
first name or last names are blank, the default will be the display
name.
Step 5
You can modify the amount of time that ICA waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 6
Click Apply to accept the configuration or Cancel to discard the
changes.
Redirect Configuration
Selecting Redirect Configuration displays an ICA Redirect Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-62).
Figure 2-62 ICA Redirect Configuration dialog box
Step 1
Click Add New Redirect Configuration. A Redirect Configuration—Add
New dialog box displays (Figure 2-63).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-56
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-63 Redirect Configuration—Add New dialog box
Step 2
Select the PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 3
Select the Redirect Number from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Click Done to accept the changes or Cancel to exit without saving the
changes.
PBX Settings
Selecting PBX Settings from the ICA General Settings dialog box
(Figure 2-61) displays an ICA PBX Settings dialog box (Figure 2-64).
Figure 2-64 ICA PBX Settings dialog box
Values in gray are the read-only values assigned at the time the PBX
was configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these
values can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration
under OW5000 Platform. Such changes will affect every application
using that PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by ICA,
use the following steps.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
2-57
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
when the PBX Type is NEAX 2400 IMS Internal IP, UNIVERGE
SV7000, or NEAX 2000 IPS.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
Step 2
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
Step 3
Check the Selected checkbox if you would like ICA to attempt to connect
to this PBX the next time it is restarted.
Consider enabling the Selected checkbox for ICA's PBX Settings, soon after
installation of OW5000 Platform. This is not enabled as a default, on a fresh install.
NOTE
Step 4
If needed, you can modify the Incremental Retry Delay. The
Incremental Retry Delay designates the amount of time the application
waits to attempt to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost. If
the connection to the PBX is lost, ICA waits for the amount of time
specified in the Incremental Retry Delay field before attempting to
reconnect the first time. If the connection still cannot be made, the
specified amount of time will be added to the delay period before the next
attempt. For example, if the Incremental Retry delay is set to 30
seconds, ICA waits 30 seconds before attempting to reconnect. If that
first attempt fails, the application waits 60 seconds before making a
second attempt to connect, then waits 90 seconds before making a third
attempt, and so on. When the application successfully reconnects to the
PBX, the delay time goes back to the amount of time set in the
Incremental Retry Delay Value field. Incremental Retry Delay Value is
typically set to 30 seconds.
Step 5
You can modify the amount of time that ICA waits for the user input
before exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 6
The Max Retry Delay specifies the maximum amount of time the
application waits between attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the
connection is lost. This is used in conjunction with the Incremental Retry
Delay and ensures that the application will try to re-establish a
connection to the PBX within a certain amount of time. The Max Retry
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-58
OW5000 Configuration
Delay Value is typically set to 1 hour to make sure that the application
will attempt to reconnect to the PBX at least once an hour.
Step 7
You can change the Data Mode that ICA uses to communicate with
Dterm users by selecting an available Data Mode from the drop-down
list. The data mode you select must be programmed for use with OAI in
the PBX, and it must be assigned to a function key button on each user's
Dterm in order for ICA to be available to the user.
The value ranges from 128 to 191 and should match the OPCODE in the
AOKC command on the NEAX 2400 IMS and UNIVERGE SV7000, or
the D70 command if using the NEAX 2000 IPS.
Step 8
You can change the LED Number that ICA lights when active on the
Dterm.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Location Status Information Configuration
The Location Status Information (LSI) options are originally configured
during the OW5000 Platform installation process. They may be
reconfigured through the OW5000 Administrator by completing the
steps below.
Step 1
Login to the OW5000 Administrator program. Once you are logged in to
OW5000 Administrator, follow this path to open the LSI configuration
options: OW5000 > Applications > Location Status Information. An
LSI General Settings dialog box displays (Figure 2-65).
Figure 2-65 LSI General Settings dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
2-59
Enter information for the Server Settings.
—Legacy TCP/IP Port 

The TCP/IP Port is the port number used by external applications to
connect to the LSI Service.
Step 3
Review the Options information.
— Display Status

Select this check box to configure LSI to show the name of the called
number.
— Password Required 

Select this check box to require users to enter a password when
accessing LSI.
—Max Idle Time

Specifies the number of seconds that LSI waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm. The default value is set at 15 seconds.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Message Settings
Selecting Message Settings displays an LSI Message Settings dialog
box (Figure 2-66).
Figure 2-66 LSI Message Settings dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-60
OW5000 Configuration
—System Presence
The default values are reconfigurable.
—SIP Presence
This is a fixed list and cannot be reconfigured.
—Default Online
Use the drop-down list to change the System Presence status.
—Default Offline
Use the drop-down list to change the default offline status. Max 16
characters.
—Default Idle
Use the drop-down list to change the System Presence status.
—Default Busy
Select the desired option from the drop-down menu.
—Default Out of Office
Select the desired option from the drop-down menu
— Default Dterm
Select the desired option for the default status when a new non SIP
presence is used for extension.
—Default Mobility
Select the desired option for the status related to the mobility feature
Step 1
To add a new message, click Add New Message. An LSI Message
Settings—Add New dialog box displays (Figure 2-67).
Figure 2-67 LSI Message Settings—Add New dialog box
Step 2
Enter a new message in the System Presence text box.
Step 3
Select the SIP Presence from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Done to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-61
PBX Settings
Selecting PBX Settings from the LSI General Settings dialog box
displays a PBX Settings Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-68).
Figure 2-68 PBX Settings Configuration dialog box
Values in gray are the read-only values assigned at the time the PBX
was configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these
values can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration
under OW5000 Platform. Such changes will effect every application
using that PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by LSI,
use the following steps:
Step 1
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
when the PBX Type is NEAX 2400 IMS Internal IP, UNIVERGE
SV7000, or NEAX 2000 IPS.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-62
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
Step 3
Check the Selected checkbox if you would like LSI to attempt to connect
to this PBX the next time it is restarted.
Consider enabling the Selected checkbox for ICA's PBX Settings, soon after
installation of OW5000 Platform. This is not enabled as a default, on a fresh install.
NOTE
Step 4
If needed, you can modify the Incremental Retry Delay. The
Incremental Retry Delay designates the amount of time the application
waits to attempt to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost. If
the connection to the PBX is lost, LSI waits for the amount of time
specified in the Incremental Retry Delay field before attempting to
reconnect the first time. If the connection still cannot be made, the
specified amount of time will be added to the delay period before the next
attempt. For example, if the Incremental Retry delay is set to 30
seconds, LSI waits 30 seconds before attempting to reconnect. If that
first attempt fails, the application waits 60 seconds before making a
second attempt to connect, then waits 90 seconds before making a third
attempt, and so on. When the application successfully reconnects to the
PBX, the delay time goes back to the amount of time set in the
Incremental Retry Delay Value field. Incremental Retry Delay Value is
typically set to 30 seconds.
Step 5
You can modify the amount of time that LSI waits for user input before
exiting on that person’s Dterm in the OAI Timeout field.
Step 6
The Max Retry Delay specifies the maximum amount of time the
application waits between attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the
connection is lost. This is used in conjunction with the Incremental Retry
Delay and ensures that the application will try to re-establish a
connection to the PBX within a certain amount of time. The Max Retry
Delay Value is typically set to 10 minutes to make sure that the
application will attempt to reconnect to the PBX at least once an hour.
Step 7
You can change the Data Mode that LSI uses to communicate with
Dterm users by selecting an available Data Mode from the drop-down
list. The data mode you select must be programmed for use with OAI in
the PBX, and it must be assigned to a function key button on each user's
Dterm in order for LSI to be available to the user.

The value ranges from 128 to 191 and should match the OPCODE in the
AOKC command on the NEAX 2400 IMS and UNIVERGE SV7000, or
the D70 command if using the NEAX 2000 IPS. 128 is assigned as the
default value.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-63
Step 8
You can change the LED Number that LSI lights when active on the
Dterm. Blank is assigned as the default value.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
OAI Server Configuration
OAI Server is a component of the OW5000 and enables Java, Web, and
other applications, except Remote Call Control, to communicate with the
PBX using NEC's Java OAI libraries. OAI Server also manages a single
connection (association) to each target PBX on behalf of the
applications.
Follow the steps below to configure OAI Server:
Step 1
Selecting OAI Server from the OW5000 Applications Options dialog box
(Figure 2-53) displays an OAI Server Settings dialog box (Figure 2-69).
Figure 2-69 OAI Server Settings dialog box
Step 2
Enter the tenant number in the OAI Tenant Number field. The Tenant
Number is used by the OAI Server when it opens facilities with the PBX.
Typically the default value of 0 is the desired value because this allows
OAI Server to work for all tenant numbers in the PBX.
The OAI Server ignores the OAI Tenant Number setting when opening the Free
Location Facility. The Free Location Facility always uses Tenant 1.
NOTE
To use the OAI Server, Selected must be checked in the PBX Settings
dialog box (Figure 2-70). When assigning a new PBX, the Selected
checkbox is checked by default.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-64
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-70 PBX Settings dialog box
Step 3
Select the PBX from the drop-down list.
Values in gray are the read-only values assigned at the time the PBX
was configured for use with the OW5000 Platform. Changes to these
values can only be made by modifying the global PBX configuration
under OW5000 Platform. Such changes will effect every application
using that PBX. To specifically modify the PBX settings used only by LSI,
use the following steps.
Step 4
Verify the value for Force Port. 

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application uses the same port each time it runs.
This should be selected to avoid problems with clearing Dterm
displays and monitoring equipment.
—No specifies that the application will retry one of the other port
numbers when the application fails to connect to the PBX because the
port may be in use by another application. This setting has no effect
when the PBX Type is NEAX 2400 IMS Internal IP, UNIVERGE
SV7000, and NEAX 2000 IPS.
You should normally select Yes for the Force Port field.
Step 5
Verify the setting for Heartbeat.

This field has the following settings:
—Yes specifies that the application checks approximately every 20
seconds to make sure the PBX connection is still alive and
operational.
—No specifies that the application will not check the PBX connection.
You should normally select Yes for the Heartbeat field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-65
Step 6
Check the Selected checkbox if you will use the OAI Server. It is
mandatory for OW5000 API (Call Control and Call Notification) and
Presence Gateway (Legacy presence of SIMPLE).
Step 7
Specify the amount of time the application waits to attempt to reconnect
to the PBX after the connection is lost in the Incremental Retry Delay
field. This value is usually 30 seconds.
Step 8
Specify the maximum amount of time the application waits between
attempts to reconnect to the PBX after the connection is lost in the Max
Retry Delay field. This value is usually 30 seconds.
Step 9
Check the Enable Free Location Facility box if an application will be
run that uses the OAI Server and requires the use of the Free Location
Facility. Because the PBX only allows one application to simultaneously
have the Free Location Facility opened for use, this box should only be
checked if instructed to avoid conflict with non-OW5000 applications that
require the Free Location Facility.
Step 10 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the settings.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Remote Call Control Configuration
Selecting Remote Call Control from the OW5000 Applications Options
dialog box (Figure 2-53) displays an RCC Setting dialog box 
(Figure 2-71).
Figure 2-71 RCC Setting dialog box
NOTE
If you have not installed Remote Call Control, this setting is not needed. For more
information, refer to the UNIVERGE OW5000 Installation Guide, OW5000 Remote
Call Control Service.
General Settings
Step 1
Enter the port number in the Listen Port field. 5060 is recommended,
but it must be configured when LCS/OCS is installed on the same server.
To set a Monitored number, use the OW5000 Platform option and then select PBX
Configurations > Reserved Numbers. See “Reserved Numbers” on page 2-39.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-66
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
NOTE
Click Apply to set the port.
To use the Remote Call Control service with SV8500, SV7000, and IPX series, a
Monitored number must be assigned. Refer to “Reserved Numbers” on page 2-39 for
more detail.
Normalization Rules
Selecting Normalization Rules from the Remote Call Control dialog box
(Figure 2-71) displays a Normalization Rules dialog box (Figure 2-72).
This option allows you to add or edit normalization rules which are used
for LCS/OCS Integration. This value is usually 30 seconds. Multiple
normalization rules can be assigned. The OW5000 system checks the
rule based on priority (first line is highest priority). By clicking the
Reorder arrow in the list can change the priority of the rule.
Figure 2-72 Normalization Rules dialog box
Adding a Normalization Rule
Clicking Add New from the Normalization Rules dialog box displays a
Remote Call Control—Normalization Rules dialog box (Figure 2-73).
Figure 2-73 Remote Call Control—Normalization Rules dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-67
Normalization Rule Info
When adding a new Normalization Rule, follow the steps below:
Step 1
Select the target Country Code from the Country Code drop-down list.
Step 2
Enter a regular expression of the target phone in the Phone Pattern
Regular Expression field. Refer to Appendix C for more details on
Regular Expression.
Step 3
Enter the translation format in the Translation Pattern field. $1 must be
in this filed.
Step 4
Enter a comment for this normalization rule.
Example1:
Phone Pattern Regular Expression: ^0([0-9*#]{3,4})$
(Phone number starts from 0 and 3 or 4 digits (total 4 or 5 digits) and
stores these digits as $1. Note that the first 0 is not included in $1).
Translation Pattern: tel:$1;phone-context=necinfrontia.com
Comment: This rule is used for NEC Infrontia, Inc.
Input phone number: 01234
Result:
tel:1234;phone-context=necinfrontia.com
Testing a Normalization Rule
Clicking Test Rule from Figure 2-73 displays a Remote Call Control—
Test Normalization Rule page (Figure 2-74). The Test Rule button
displays when more than one Rule is assigned.
Figure 2-74 Remote Call Control—Test Normalization Rule dialog box
This page provides test functionality for normalization rules. There are 2
test capabilities: TEST TRANSLATION and TEST ANI TRANSLATION.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-68
OW5000 Configuration
TEST TRANSLATION is used to check the regular expression of the
rule, but the OW5000 system determines the rule not only this regular
expression.
TEST ANI TRANSLATION is used to check how the OW5000 converts
this input phone number. OW5000 uses several internal logics to
determine the translation results so this test field allows the user to see
how the OW5000 works. To test TEST ANI TRANSLATION, assign a
Country Code for the Rule and Location in PBX Management page.
TEST TRANSLATION
Step 1
Enter the test phone number in Test Dialed Number and then click
Check Rule. 

If there is a matching normalization rule in the system, the normalization
rule and the translated result displays on this page. 

If there is no matching rule in the system, Translated number field is a
blank. The Rule is checked from the top normalization rule so if multiple
rules are matched for the test value, the highest priority rule displays.
TEST ANI TRANSLATION
Step 1
Enter the test phone in the Test ANI field, select the destination PBX
from the drop-down list, and then click Check Rule.

If there is a matching normalization rule in the system, the rule and
translated result displays in the Translated number field. 

If there is no matching rule in the system, the Translated number filed is
a blank. Rule is checked from the top normalization rule so if multiple
rules are matched for test value, highest priority rule is displayed.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-69
Maintaining the OW5000 Directory
Selecting Directory from the OW5000 Options dialog box (Figure 2-12), displays
an OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-75). The following
figure is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
Figure 2-75 OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Configuring Categories
Configuring DIDs
Configuring Locations
Configuring Organizations
Person Management
Configuring Positions
User Privileges Configuration
User Management Configuration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-70
OW5000 Configuration
Configuring Categories
The Categories option is used to group organizations, locations, and
people together.
Prior to adding categories, the Organizations, Locations, and People
must already be configured by OW5000 Administrator. Please refer to
“Configuring Organizations” on page 2-78, “Configuring Locations” on
page 2-75, and “Person Management” on page 2-81.
Selecting Categories from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-75) displays Figure 2-76.
Figure 2-76 Category Management dialog box
Adding Categories
Step 1
To add a new category, click Categories and then click Add New. 
Figure 2-77 displays.
Figure 2-77 Add New Category dialog box
Step 2
Enter the Category Name and a Category Description.
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
The category is added to the list
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-71
Figure 2-78 Category Added dialog box
Editing Categories
Step 1
Select the desired category name and click Edit. Make the necessary
changes and then do one of the following.
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Assigning Categories
Select the desired category name and click Assign Categories. Figure 2-79
displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-72
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-79 Assign Categories dialog box
Step 1
Select an Organization or use the Search option to link an organization
with the category.
Step 2
Select the search criteria from the Filter drop-down list.
Step 3
Select the Field in which to search from the drop-down list.

For example, Contains, Equals, or Starts With and click Search. A
Database Search Results screen displays listing all previously entered
data.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-73
Configuring DIDs
Selecting DIDs from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-75) displays a DID dialog box (Figure 2-80).
Displays only if the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
NOTE
Figure 2-80 DID dialog box
Adding a DID Record
Step 1
Click Add New DID from the DID dialog box. A DID Management dialog
box displays (Figure 2-81). If a company has not been defined, an error
message will display in the dialog box.
Figure 2-81 DID Management dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Enter the Name associated with the DID field.
Step 3
Select the PBX from the drop-down list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-74
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Select the Extension from the drop-down list.
Step 5
Select the Company from the drop-down list.
To remove or change an existing DID Record, select the desired record and then
click the Pencil
or Trashcan
icon.
NOTE
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Manage Custom Fields
Selecting Manage Custom Fields displays a Manage Custom Fields
dialog box (Figure 2-82).
Figure 2-82 Manage Custom Fields dialog box
x
To remove or change an existing Custom Field, select the desired record and then
click the Pencil
or Trashcan
icon.
NOTE
Step 1
To add a new field, click Add New Custom Field from Figure 2-82. A
DID Custom Field dialog box displays (Figure 2-83).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-75
Figure 2-83 DID Custom Field dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Type the Field Name in the text box.
Step 3
Select the Required checkbox if this entry is mandatory.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Configuring Locations
Location is used to assign location data. In the Employee Role page, the
user can make a relation between an employee and a location.
Selecting Locations from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-75) displays a Location Management dialog box 
(Figure 2-84).
Figure 2-84 Location Management dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-76
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a Location
Step 1
Click Add New from the Location Management dialog box. An Add New
Location dialog box displays (Figure 2-85).
• Highlight Locations to add a new parent location.
• Highlight a location beneath the parent location to add a new location to the parent.
NOTE
Figure 2-85 Add New Location dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Enter the Name of the location.
Step 3
Select the Type of location from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Enter any desired Notes.
Step 5
To assign phone numbers, click Add New. An Add Location Phone
dialog box displays (Figure 2-86).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-77
Figure 2-86 Add Location Phone dialog box
Step 6
Select the PBX or choose <All> from the drop-down list.
Step 7
To find a number, select a Filter option from the drop-down list and then
click Search.
Step 8
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-78
OW5000 Configuration
Configuring Organizations
Organization is used to assign organization data. In the Employee Role
page, the user can make a relation between an employee and an
organization.
Selecting Organizations from the OW5000 Directory Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-75) displays an Organizations Management dialog
box (Figure 2-87).
Figure 2-87 Organizations Management dialog box
Use this dialog box to add, edit, or delete organizations. Use Expand All
to view all Organizations or Collapse All to only view the parent
organization.
To remove or edit an existing organization, highlight the organization and click Edit
or Delete.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-79
Adding an Organization
Step 1
NOTE
Click Add New from the Organization dialog box. An Organization—Add
New dialog box displays (Figure 2-88).
Highlight Organization to add a new parent organization.
• Highlight an organization beneath the parent organization to add a new
organization to the parent.
• Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
You can also use the plus and minus symbols to Collapse or Expand the view.
NOTE
Figure 2-88 Organization—Add New dialog box
Step 2
Select the Type of number to add from the drop-down list, either Internal
or External.
Step 3
Enter the Name of the organization.
Step 4
Select the Type of organization from the drop-down list.
Step 5
Select whether or not the organization is Internal or External by
selecting the appropriate option button.
Step 6
Enter any desired Notes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-80
OW5000 Configuration
Adding Locations
Step 1
If no locations are assigned, or you wish to add more locations, click Add
New in the Locations section. An Organization—Add Locations dialog
box displays (Figure 2-89).
Figure 2-89 Organization—Add Locations dialog box
Step 2
Select the location to add from the drop-down list and then click Select.
Adding Phone Numbers
Step 1
If no phone numbers are assigned, or you wish to add more numbers,
click Add in the Phone Numbers section. An Organization—Add Phone
Numbers dialog box displays (Figure 2-90).
Figure 2-90 Organization—Add Phone Numbers dialog box
Step 2
Select the PBX from the drop-down list.
Step 3
To find a number, select a Filter option from the drop-down list and then
click Search.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
2-81
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Person Management
Selecting People from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-75) displays a Person Management dialog box (Figure 2-91).
Figure 2-91 Person Management dialog box
Searching the Database
Use the following steps to conduct a search in the Person database.
Step 1
Select the search criteria from the Filter drop-down list.
A Role, such as User and employee, is set in the Roles page. Select All in case a
Role is not assigned. Refer to “Roles” on page 2-87.
NOTE
Step 2
Select the Field in which to search from the drop-down list.

For example, Last Name, First Name, Contact Method, or Login ID.
Another way to search is to select Starts with and then enter data in the
text box and click Search. A Database Search Results screen displays
listing all previously entered data. A wildcard (*) is not required. If you
want to display all Persons, set blank in the search field or set None as
the search target and then click Search.
To add a new person, see “Adding a Person” on page 2-84.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-82
OW5000 Configuration
Manage Person Custom Fields
Use the following steps to add user defined fields in the Person
database.
This parameter is supported only when other OW5000 applications, which are
supported in US market, is installed in the system.
NOTE
Step 1
Click Manage Custom Fields. A Person Custom Fields dialog box
displays (Figure 2-92).
Figure 2-92 Person Custom Fields dialog box
Step 2
Select an available undefined UserDefined field and enter the desired
label for the field.
Step 3
Select the Required checkbox if the information to be entered in the
newly defined field is mandatory.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-83
Full Name Display Format
Use the following steps to customize the display name of a Person. At
least one person must be assigned before changing this format.
Step 1
Select Full Name Format from the Person Manager dialog box. A Full
Name Display Format dialog box displays (Figure 2-93).
Figure 2-93 Full Name Display Format dialog box
Step 2
Choose a format from the drop-down list to display a Preview of Full
Name. Available options are shown in Figure 2-94.
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to update the changes.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Figure 2-94 Full Name Display Options
URI Format Configuration
Selecting URI Format from Figure 2-91 displays a URI Format
Configuration dialog box (Figure 2-95).
Figure 2-95 URI Format Configuration dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-84
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
Select one of the following keys from the URI Key Parameter drop-down
list: The selected key is treated as $0:
• Primary Extension
• Prefix + Primary Extension
• First Name
• Last Name
• First character of First name + Last Name
• Login ID
Primary Extension and Prefix + Primary Extension keys are only available and
displayed in the US Market.
NOTE
NOTE
If Login ID is selected as the URI Key Parameter in the Person URI Derivation, User
roles must be selected for creation in the Import Settings so that the Login ID
database field can be mapped to a Login ID column in the Input File. This column
MUST contain unique Login IDs for each person being added or updated. If an input
record specifies a Login ID that is already in use in the OW5000 database, data
associated with the existing Person can be overwritten by the data that's being
imported for that Login ID. Please ensure that if you are attempting to add a new
Person to the database, that the specified Login ID is unique relative to existing
Login IDs in the database and relative to other Login IDs in the DBTool Input File.
Step 2
Enter the Translation Pattern Regular Expression. Maximum of 100
characters, only single byte.
An IMURI FORMAT is used only for the OW5000 applications which are released in
US market.
NOTE
Adding a Person
Use the following steps to add a new record to the Person database.
Step 1
Click Add New Person in the Person Manager dialog box 
(Figure 2-91). A Person Management dialog box displays (Figure 2-96). 

To create a new Person from a pre-defined Template, select the desired
template from the Use Template drop-down menu, then click Add New
Person. Refer to “Template Management” on page 2-118, for more
information on creating a new template.
Example:
URI Key Parameter : First Name
Translation Pattern : [email protected]
First name of person : Steve
Auto generated SIP URI : [email protected]
Refer to “Regular Expressions” on page Appendix B-1 for more information on the
database fields and their sizes.
REFERENCE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-85
Person
When adding a new record from the Person Management dialog box, the
first screen to display is the Person tab (Figure 2-96). The figure below
displays when United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-96 Person Management—Add New dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
NOTE
Step 1
Enter the Last Name and the First Name for the new record.
Step 2
If desired, enter data into the Middle Name, and Display Name fields.
Display Name is used when OW5000 applications display the person’s name on a
Dterm (call logs, calling party information, etc.). This name is limited to 16 characters
due to display size limitations and is auto generated using the person’s first and last
names. You may choose to enter a Display Name in the text box to override/prevent
auto generation. Should you wish to resume auto-generation of this field at a later
date, simply clear it by back spacing over any existing value.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-86
OW5000 Configuration
• First character of Middle Name + .(dot) is used for the Full Name Display Format. If
the Display Name is blank, the Full Name Display Format is applied.
NOTE
• DBTool Person import — Display Name Generation checks this Display Name
parameter.
Step 3
If desired, select a Prefix or Suffix for this record.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
Enter a SIP URI if you are using a SIP Server. This SIP URI must be
unique in the system. If you are using a SIP terminal, it must be the same
as the SIP URI that was assigned in the Extension page or
prefix+extension SIP URI.
Select Auto Input to set auto generated SIPURI based on the regular
expression assigned in URI format page, overwrite the SIPURI that is
displayed, or do nothing if the regular expression is not configured.

In the URI Format Configuration page, if the Prefix + Primary Extension
or Primary Extension is selected as the SIP URI Key Parameter($0), the
Primary Extension must be set as the contact method before this step.
Step 5
Select a SIP Access Server from the drop-down list.
Step 6
Select a SIPUA Group name from the drop-down list.
IM URI, IM Access Server, Voice Mail Server, Subscriber ID and Photo are used for
some OW5000 Applications released in US market only.
NOTE
Step 7
Enter the IM URI number.
Step 8
Select the IM Access Server from the drop-down list.
Step 9
Select a Voice Mail Server from the drop-down list.
Step 10 Enter the Subscriber ID number.
Step 11
To add a Photo, click Browse. An Add Photo dialog box displays 
(Figure 2-97).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-87
Figure 2-97 Add Photo dialog box
Step 12 Enter the file name of the desired photo or choose a different path to find
the location and then click Open. The file name is added in the Photo
field.
NOTE
When adding a picture for a person to be viewed in the UC700 client, please be sure
to put pictures in a folder accessible by the local service account. Do NOT select a
path in a specific user's My Documents or My Pictures folder, for example. Instead,
create a separate folder under the C or D drive.
Step 13 Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Roles
Roles can be added to any person that is already configured in the
Person database. After selecting the desired person, click the Roles
tab to display a Roles dialog box (Figure 2-98). The following figure
displays when United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-98 Roles dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-88
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a User Role
Step 1
Click Add Role. A Roles—Add New dialog box displays (Figure 2-99).
The following figure displays when United States is selected as
the Sales Regions.
The dialog boxes will differ depending on the type of role selected. User and
Employee are required for OW5000 API (InformationAPI).
IMPORTANT
The following screens reflect the steps necessary for adding a User as
the role type. Multiple roles can be assigned for one person.
Figure 2-99 User Roles—Add New dialog box
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 2
Select User from the drop-down list.
Step 3
Enter the information in the following fields:
—Login ID
—New Password
—Confirm New Password
NOTE
User must be selected if SOAP (Information API) is used and the user needs to login
to OW5000 Administrator. The length of the password must be at least 8 characters
long and include the following rules:
1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
1 Digit(1-9)
1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash, and single or
double quotes)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
2-89
For Windows Authentication, enter the NTLM Login ID for the user.
UC700 only for this parameter. This parameter does not display if UC700 is not
installed or if United States is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Step 5
To disable the user role for any reason, click the check box Login is
disabled.
Step 6
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.
Step 7
To select the Security Roles for this user, click the checkbox for each
application the user is allowed to view or use, and then select the role
type. For example, an administrator, a user, a recipient, or an assistant.
Step 8
Select the Confidentiality Status for this role from the drop-down menu.
This is not required for configuration unless United States is selected as
the Sales Region.
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the role and continue with the configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Adding an Employee Role
After selecting the name, click the Roles tab from the Person
Management dialog box (Figure 2-96). Select Employee from the dropdown role type list box to display an Employee Role Type dialog box
(Figure 2-100). 

If the selected person already has a role assigned, you can edit or delete
icon (Figure 2-98). The
the role by clicking the Pencil or Trashcan
following figure displays when United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-90
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-100 Employee Roles—Add New dialog box
Step 1
Enter the Employee ID.
The Employee Position, Employee Type, and Confidentiality Status are not used.
NOTE
Step 2
Select the Employee Position from the drop-down list.
Step 3
Select the Employee Type from the drop-down list. For example, a
Contractor, Permanent, or Part Time employee.
Step 4
To set an Organization for this employee, click Select and then choose
an organization. For configuring an Organization, see “Configuring
Organizations” on page 2-78. To remove an organization, click Remove.
Step 5
To set a Location, click Select and then choose a location. For
configuring a Location, see “Configuring Locations” on page 2-75. To
remove a location, click Remove.
Step 6
Select the Confidentiality Status from the drop-down menu.
Step 7
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the role and continue with the configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-91
Contact Methods
To add a contact method, select the Contact Method tab. A Contact
Method dialog box displays (Figure 2-101). The following figure is an
example when the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-101 Contact Method dialog box
Step 1
If no Contact Methods are configured, click Add New Contact Method.
A Select Contact Method—Type dialog box displays (Figure 2-102). The
following figure is an example when the United States is
selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-102 Select Contact Method—Type dialog box
Step 2
Select the type of contact method from the drop-down list.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
The Contact Method dialog boxes may differ depending on the type of
contact method you selected. Primary Extension, Secondary Extension
and Tertiary Extension are available as a SIP Presence feature. If you
are using a softphone collaboration feature, the Primary Extension
should be a collaborated extension, and the Secondary Extension should
be the softphone.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-92
OW5000 Configuration
For example, if you selected Primary Extension from the drop-down list,
a Contact Methods—Primary Extension dialog box displays 
(Figure 2-103). The following figure is an example when the
United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-103 Contact Methods—Primary Extension dialog box
Step 3
Select the Priority from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Select the PBX Name from the drop-down list.
Step 5
Do one of the following to choose an Extension:
—select the target Extension from the extension list
—click Add New Extension 

Clicking the Add New Extension button opens an Extension dialog
box. Refer to “Adding Extensions” on page 2-18 for more information.
After entering all necessary information, click Apply.
—search for an extension, by choosing Contains, Ends With, Equals,
or Starts With from the drop-down list, then enter the desired value
and click Search.
Step 6
Select Pilot Number for personal voice mailbox (displayed only when
UC700 is installed).
Step 7
Enter the Dterm Password (if applicable) in the text box.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 8
2-93
Choose the Confidentiality Status from the drop-down list. (Only
available for the US market).
Pilot Number, Dterm Password, and Confidentiality Status are not used unless the
OW5000 Applications released in the US market are used.
NOTE
Step 9
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the contact method and continue with the
configuration.
—Click Done to save the information and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Address Information
This is displayed only when the United States is selected as the Sales
Region or if an OW5000 Application which released in US market is
installed.
Step 1
To add an address, select the Addresses tab. If no Addresses have
been configured, click Add New Address. An Address Information
dialog box displays (Figure 2-104).
Figure 2-104 Address Information dialog box
I
Step 2
Select the Address Type from the drop-down list.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Enter/select information in the following fields:
—Country/Region
—Street
—City
—Zip/Postal Code
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-94
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to add the address.
—Click Done to display the new entry.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
Editing or Deleting Person
To edit or delete a person, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Click the Pencil
(Figure 2-91).
icon next to the desired Person to edit the data
Step 2
After you have completed the editing, do the one of following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to save the information and close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 3
Click the Trashcan
icon next to the desired Person to delete the data.
Person Range Delete
Follows the steps below to range delete a Person.
Step 1
Click Range Delete from the Person Management dialog box 
(Figure 2-91).
Figure 2-105 Person Range Delete dialog box
Step 2
Select the desired filter of the range delete from drop-down list.
Step 3
If you use an alphabet or numeric value as the query parameter, enter
the value in the From and To text box fields. If another query parameter
is used, such as a multi-byte character, enter the value in the From text
box field only.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
2-95
Click Delete. This may take a few minutes depending on the number of
people to be removed. A maximum of 500 people can be deleted at a
time.
A Person cannot be deleted if they are is use by the system. In this case, retry the
range delete or execute after business hours.
NOTE
DBTool—BulkDelete can be used as a Person delete.
NOTE
Configuring Positions
Step 1
Selecting Position from the OW5000 Directory Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-75) displays a Position Management dialog
box (Figure 2-106). The following figure is an example when
the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-106 Position Management dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-96
OW5000 Configuration
Adding a Position
Step 1
Click Add New Position from the Position Management dialog box. A
Position—Add New dialog box displays (Figure 2-107).
Figure 2-107 Position—Add New dialog box
Step 2
Enter the position name in the Title field.
Step 3
(Optional) Enter the position abbreviation in the Abbreviation field.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the information.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
To remove or edit an existing position, select the Pencil
or Trashcan
icon.
NOTE
Step 5
To find a position, enter data in the Filter text box and click Search.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-97
Configuring Specialities
Selecting Specialities from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog
box (Figure 2-75) displays a Specialities dialog box (Figure 2-108).
Specialities is displayed only when UA5200 is installed in the system.
Figure 2-108 Specialities dialog box
Adding a Speciality
Step 1
Click Add New Speciality from the Specialities dialog box. A
Specialty—Add New dialog box displays (Figure 2-109).
Figure 2-109 Specialty—Add New dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-98
OW5000 Configuration
Step 2
Enter a name in the Description field.
Step 3
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the speciality.
—Click Done to exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Step 4
To remove or edit an existing specialty, select the Pencil
Trashcan icon next to the specialty name.
or
User Privileges Configuration
Step 1
Selecting User Privileges from the OW5000 Directory Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-75) displays a User Privilege Management dialog
box (Figure 2-110). The following figure is an example when the
United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
Figure 2-110 User Privilege Management dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
NOTE
2-99
Step 2
To modify privileges for a user, enter the user name in the Search text
box. You can also search by Organizations, Locations, Roles, or
Security.
Step 3
Select the desired application(s) in which to change privileges, and then
select the privilege type from the drop-down list.
Step 4
Click Apply.
If the person being modified does not have an assigned role but Organization/
Location is selected on this page, an Employee role will be created for this person
and associated with the selected Organization/Location.
If the person is already assigned a role, like physician/employee/patient, and has an
associated Organization/Location, they will simply be updated with the new values.
NOTE
If multiple people are assigned User roles using the User Privilege page, the default
password that the OW5000 uses for the created logins is Passw0rd$.
NOTE
A maximum of 500 people can be modified at one time.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-100
OW5000 Configuration
User Management Configuration
Selecting Users from the OW5000 Directory Configuration dialog box
(Figure 2-75) displays a User Management dialog box (Figure 2-111).
This option allows you to manage user information, and to add or
change application and role privileges. The following figure is an
example when the United States is selected as the Sales Regions.
The Password for an Administrator can only be changed from this configuration
page. The Person Management Roles page can be used for other person
configurations.
IMPORTANT
Figure 2-111 User Management dialog box
Use the steps below to change passwords, application privileges, or to
delete a user account.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-101
Modifying a User Account
Use the following steps to modify an account.
Step 1
Select the Pencil
icon next to the desired user from the list of
displayed names (Figure 2-111), or enter data in the Filter By field and
click Search.
Step 2
Enter the Login ID.
Fields which must be completed are designated with an asterisk (*).
NOTE
Step 3
Enter a new password in the New Password field.
The length of the password must be at least eight characters long and include the
following rules:
NOTE
1 Uppercase letter (A-Z)
1 Lowercase letter (a-z)
1 Digit(1-9)
1 Special Character (excluding a space, square brackets, backslash, and single or
double quotes)
Step 4
Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password field.
Step 5
For Windows Authentication, enter the NTLM Login ID for the user.
This parameter is displayed only when the United States is selected as the Sales
Region or if OW5000 Applications which are released in US market is installed.
NOTE
Step 6
To disable the user role for any reason, click the check box Login is
disabled.
Step 7
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.
Step 8
Select the desired privilege for OW5000 Administrator as well as any
installed applications. See each application's installation guide for a
definition of each available choice.
Step 9
Click Apply.
Deleting a User Account
Step 1
Select the Trashcan icon next to the desired user from the list of
displayed names (Figure 2-111), or enter data in the Filter By field and
click Search. A delete confirmation dialog box displays.
Step 2
Click OK to delete the user role for this person.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-102
OW5000 Configuration
Application Data Management
From the Application Data Management page, it is possible to change
the configuration data of the OW5000 system. This configuration change
is allowed only for maintenance, and should never be changed without
first consulting with an NEC representative.
IM Archiving Management
Using the IM Archiving Management option, you can configure IM
archiving for the OW5000 system. This configuration page is restricted,
and only a user who has special privileges can see the Instant Message
menu.
Adding IM Archiving privileges for a User
Use the steps below to display the IM Archiving Management menu. It is
assumed that the user, who manages IM Archiving configurations, has
already been created and has a User role.
Step 1
Login as administrator. For more information, refer to Chapter 2,
"Logging into OW5000 Administrator" on page 2-4.
Step 2
Click OW5000 > Directory > People and then select the desired user
who should have IM Archiving Management privileges. Note that admin
cannot have this privilege for security reason.
Step 3
Click the Role tab and select the User role. Check IM Admin security
permission, then click Apply or Done.
The user who has IM Archiving Management privileges may be able to see all IM
sessions of the system. This privilege must be assigned to only one or a limited
number of users.
IMPORTANT
IM Archiving Settings
Logging in using an IM Admin account, displays an Instant Messages
menu under OW5000.
View Logs
Selecting Instant Messages from OW5000 displays an IM Archiving
Management dialog box (Figure 2-112).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-103
Figure 2-112 IM Archiving Management dialog box
This page displays all IM sessions for those using Instant Message. The
following query is available on this page to specify the session. A
combination of following parameters is also available.
Table 2-5 IM Parameters
Parameter
Description
Start Date / End Date
Query the messages for a specific term.
Sender/Receiver IM URI
Query the messages based on the URI.
IM Text
Query the message based on the text.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-104
OW5000 Configuration
Configuration
Selecting Instant Messages > Configuration from OW5000
Administrator displays an IM Archiving Management Configuration
dialog box (Figure 2-113).
Figure 2-113 IM Archiving Management—Configuration dialog box
Table 2-6 IM archiving Management Parameters
Parameter
Description
IM Log Age
The archiving process uses this value to find old logs
to archive and eventually delete from the OW5000
database. Entering 0 for this field means to archive
everything. This Does Not retain any records in the
database.
Maximum File Size
If, during one instance of archiving, the file reaches the
maximum specified size, another file is created with the
same name and appended with a Time Stamp to
archive the remaining messages. This goes on until all
the messages chosen by archiving process for the
current session are archived.
Maximum file size is 500MB.
IM Archiving Password
The password used to encrypt the data when it is
exported.
Important: This password is used every time an
archive file is created. So, once it is changed, new and
old archived files cannot be opened at the same time
using Archive Viewer because the encrypted key is
changed.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
NOTE
2-105
Parameter
Description
Archive Now
Sets up a schedule that Scheduler picks up and starts
the archiving process using the DBTool export engine.
The archiving process is also responsible for deletion
of IM logs from OW5000 database. Clicking this button
will inform the user the number of logs to be archived.
By default, Instant Message (IM) archive files are stored in C:\Program
Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\archive. The directory can be changed
using Application Data Management in OW5000 Administrator and searching on
the IM Archive Directory key. Users may want to change the directory to manage the
amount of disk space that is being used by the archiving process.
Administrators can use the estimate of 100K bytes per User per month when
calculating the amount of space that will be used by the archival process. This
estimate is based on 200 messages per month, per User, and an average message
size of 55 bytes.
Schedule
To enable scheduled archiving, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Check the Enabled check box and click Save.
Step 2
Select the Recurring Type from the drop-down list. Selection options
are One Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a
frequency of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The
display screen is dependent on the kind of schedule created.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By: Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End Date when
an end date is not needed.
If a One Time schedule is set before the current time, the schedule will not be
executed.
NOTE
A One Time schedule only needs the start date and time. A Recurring schedule
needs the setting of Recurrence Pattern in addition to the Duration of Recurrence.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-106
OW5000 Configuration
History
Step 1
Click the History tab to display Figure 2-114. This dialog box displays
the results of the schedule process for IM Archiving.
Figure 2-114 History dialog box
When a schedule is executed, the Start Data, End Date and Results are
displayed.
Settings Configuration
Selecting Settings from the OW5000 Options dialog box (Figure 2-12), displays an
OW5000 General Settings dialog box (Figure 2-115).
General Settings
Follow the steps below to configure General Settings. The following
figure is an example when the United States is selected as the Sales
Regions.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-107
Figure 2-115 OW5000 General Settings dialog box
Step 1
Select the Default Country Code from the drop-down list.
Step 2
Enter the Reporting Services URL. The OW5000 installed server is set
as the default URL. This parameter is displayed only when the
United States is selected as the Sales Region.
Step 3
Select the Default Home Page. The Extension or Person page can be
selected as the default page when you log into OW5000 Administrator.
When logging in after a session timeout, the last page you used before the timeout
displays; not the Default Home Page.
NOTE
Step 4
To set the password to never expire for the user, click the check box
Password never expires.

When Password never expires is checked, set the validity period for
the password. This parameter is disabled if Password Never Expires is
set.
Step 5
In the License Manager Connection Information section, do the
following:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-108
OW5000 Configuration
—enter the IP Address/Name and the Port number to set the LMC
server connection IP Address. This is a mandatory parameter.
—enter the Port number to set the LMC Server connection port. This is a
mandatory parameter.
This configuration is not required when Asia is selected as the Sales Region.
NOTE
Step 6
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the speciality.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes.
Countries & States
Follow the steps below to configure Countries & States.
Figure 2-116 OW5000 Countries & States dialog box
Adding a New Country
Step 1
Click Add New Country/Region in the Countries & States dialog box
(Figure 2-116). Figure 2-117 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-109
Figure 2-117 Adding New Country/Region dialog box
Step 2
Enter the Description and the Country Code.
Step 3
Do one of the following for the Is Default For Install field.
—Do not check if you are creating a new Country.
—Do check if this new country is treated as the default country when
more than one county has the same country code.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-110
OW5000 Configuration
Adding New Region
Step 1
Select the target Country from the country list (Figure 2-116).
Step 2
State/Provinces displays at the bottom of list, so click Add New State/
Province. A State/Provinces dialog box displays.
Figure 2-118 State/Provinces dialog box
Step 3
Enter the Name and Code.
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the record.
—Click Done to close the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-111
Schedule Configuration
OW5000 provides schedule functionality of data import/export and
database backup. It allows a variety of scheduling types such as onetime, daily, weekly and monthly. Also, the history page shows the result
of the schedule.
Creating a DBTool Schedule
Select Scheduler from the OW5000 Options dialog box (Figure 2-12)
and follow the steps below.
Step 1
Click the DBTool tab to display Figure 2-119, and then follow the steps
below to configure the schedules.
Figure 2-119 Schedule Profile dialog box
Step 2
When scheduling an existing profile, click the Pencil
icon to display a
Scheduling dialog box (Figure 2-120). To delete or cancel a schedule,
icon. Refer to Chapter 6, "Database Operations"
click the Trashcan
on page 6-1 for information on creating a DBTool Profile.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-112
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-120 Scheduling (One Time) dialog box
Step 3
Check the Enabled check box. When checked, the scheduled profile is
available.
Step 4
Select the Recurring Type from the drop-down list. Selection options are
One Time (non-recurring), or Recurring. If recurring is selected, a
frequency of daily, weekly, or monthly is available for selection. The
display screen is dependent on the kind of schedule created. 

Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
If a One Time schedule is set before the current time, the schedule will not be
executed.
NOTE
A One Time schedule only needs the start date and time. A Recurring schedule
needs the setting of Recurrence Pattern in addition to the Duration of Recurrence.
NOTE
For instance, if you select Recurring from the Schedule Type dropdown list and select Daily as the Recurrence Pattern, Figure 2-121
displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-113
Figure 2-121 Scheduling (Recurring Daily) dialog box
This Schedule is executed on a daily basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export everyday.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
Selecting Weekly as the Recurrence Pattern displays Figure 2-122.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-114
OW5000 Configuration
Figure 2-122 Scheduling (Recurring Weekly) dialog box
This schedule is executed on a weekly basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export every week.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
Selecting Monthly as the Recurrence Pattern displays Figure 2-123.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-115
Figure 2-123 Scheduling (Recurring Monthly) dialog box
This schedule is executed on a monthly basis. Set 1 to run the schedule
import/export every month.
Duration of Recurrence is used to configure a detailed schedule.
Start Date: Sets the start date of this schedule.
Start Time: Sets the start time of this schedule.
End By:
Sets the end date of this schedule. Select No End
Date when you do not need to set an end date.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-116
OW5000 Configuration
Confirmation of Schedule Results
To confirm the schedule results, use the Log Viewer by following the
steps below.
Step 1
Click Start > All Programs > NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform >
LogViewer, and then select Scheduler and DBTool, which includes the
log of confirmation dates, and then click Start Search.
When the scheduler is executed, the following event is logged 
(Table 2-7).
Table 2-7 Scheduler Execution
Severity
Debug
Application
Scheduler
Description
Successfully executed.DbToolPlugin:
When the DBTool is executed, the following event is logged (Table 2-8).
Table 2-8 DBTool Execution
Severity
Info
Application
DBTool
Description
New Application has started logging: APP:DBTool PID:
<PID #> TID:<TID #> USER:Administrator MACHINE:
<OW5000 server name> EXE:C:\Program
Files\NEC\OW5000\DBTools\DBToolConsole.exe
EventSource:OAIMsg.dll.
When the DBTool process is completed, the following event is logged
(Table 2-9).
Table 2-9 DBTool Process Completed
Severity
Dbug
Step 2
Application
DBTool
Description
Closing Log
If a schedule is not executed correctly, an Error event is logged between
the executed and completed event.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-117
Creating a Database Backup Schedule
Step 1
Click the Database Backup tab to display Figure 2-124, and then follow
the steps below to configure the schedules.
Figure 2-124 Database Backup dialog box
Step 2
Enter the number of days in the Retention Days edit box to define the
amount of time the backup file will be kept in the server. Default is 14
days.
Step 3
Enter the File Name to define the saved backup file name. By default,
the file is backed-up in the same location as where SQL Server is
installed. By clicking Test File Path, you can confirm that the database
backup file was created correctly.
Step 4
Set the schedule based on your requirements. Refer to “Creating a
DBTool Schedule” on page 2-111 for more details.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-118
OW5000 Configuration
History
Step 1
Click the History tab to display Figure 2-125. This dialog box displays
the results of the schedule process for both DBTool and Database
Backup.
Figure 2-125 History dialog box
When a schedule is executed, the Type, Event Name, Date and the
results display. If the schedule process fails, click on the icon (left side)
of the results information. The request is then executed immediately.
Template Management
From the Template Management page, it is possible to create a template
related to person management. This page allows you to create a new
person and their related configuration; such as roles, contact methods,
and address information, in a single page.
Selecting Template Management from the Template dialog box,
displays a Template Management dialog box (Figure 2-127).
Figure 2-126 Template Management dialog box
To remove or change an existing Custom Field, select the desired record and then
click the Pencil or Trashcan icon.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
Step 1
2-119
To add a new template click Add New Template from the Template
Management dialog box. A Template Management Configuration Page
displays (Figure 2-127).
Figure 2-127 Template Management dialog box
Step 2
Select the Template Type from the drop-down menu and enter the
Template Name.
Only Custom Person is available as the Template Type in OW5000 R5.
NOTE
Step 3
Select the desired parameters to be configured in this template from the
Person, Roles, Contact Methods, and Addresses pane.
Last Name, First Name, Middle Name and Display Name will be displayed when this
template is selected in the Person page regardless of this configuration
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-120
OW5000 Configuration
Step 4
Do one of the following:
—Click Apply to save the settings.
—Click Done to save and then exit the dialog box.
—Click Cancel to exit without saving the changes
MA4000 Integration
Please refer to Chapter 7, "OW5000-MA4000 Integration" on page 7-1
for more information.
Version Information
Selecting Version Information from “OW5000 Options dialog box” on
page 2-8, displays an OW5000 Version Information dialog box 
(Figure 2-128). This is used for informational purposes only.
Figure 2-128 OW5000 Version Information dialog box
NOTE
If Asia (Others) is selected as the Sales Region, check the OW5000 version using
the steps below.
1. Open Issue.txt from C:\Program Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\Issue.txt
(default).
2. Confirm the underline part as the version information.
DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE
SC-3904 OWX PROG-R4 ISSUE X.XX
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Configuration
2-121
Exiting OW5000 Administrator
The OW5000 Administrator user interface can be exited by closing your
browser or by clicking Log Out in the OW5000 Administrator Control
Panel (Figure 2-12).
NOTE
OW5000 Administrator will automatically time out if there is no activity after 15
minutes (default). If this happens, you will need to login again to continue the
configuration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
2-122
OW5000 Configuration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-1
3
WatchDog
WatchDog is a utility in the OW5000. It operates in the background and
monitors selected software service applications.
Should a service encounter some type of data error, it may shutdown
and disable the network service it was providing. Since these services
cannot restart themselves, WatchDog can detect the service outage and
then restart the service application. WatchDog can monitor multiple
service applications residing on the local server.
When WatchDog detects a monitored service shutdown, it first makes a
log entry, and after a set interval, restarts the service. Log entries can
aid in application troubleshooting. If the monitored service has any
dependent services set up (typically automatically set during the
installation of the application), they will be stopped before the
monitored service is restarted.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
• Verifying the WatchDog Status
• WatchDog Helper
Verifying the WatchDog Status
WatchDog is installed during the initial OW5000 installation. No
additional installation is required. It is configured by default to
automatically start every time the OW5000 Server boots.
These settings can be verified through the Administrative Tools window.
WatchDog cannot monitor the service if it is installed on another server.
WatchDog Helper
WatchDog Helper is the graphical user interface (GUI) for the OW5000
WatchDog application. The following sections describe the windows and
functions of WatchDog Helper.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-2
WatchDog
Main Window
Starting the WatchDog Helper program displays the WatchDog Helper
main window (Figure 3-1).
Step 1
Start WatchDog Helper by clicking the Start button on the workstation
desktop, and then select All Programs > NEC OW5000 > Runtime
Platform > WatchDog Helper.
Figure 3-1 WatchDog Helper main window
The columns in the WatchDog Helper main window (Figure 3-1) are
described in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 WatchDog Helper main window—columns
Option
Action
OW5000
Application
Services that have been assigned to be monitored
by WatchDog.
Host Machine
Name of the local Host server where services are
monitored by WatchDog.
Monitoring
Indicates whether WatchDog monitoring is
currently enabled for a service. A service may be
listed to be monitored, but can have monitoring
temporarily turned off to allow for specific testing
of the service application. This would be useful if
testing could generate errors or changes in the
operating status of the service.
Retry Interval
Displays the time interval (in seconds) that
WatchDog will wait, after it monitors a service
shutdown, before it restarts the monitored service.
This interval is set as appropriate for the service
and its specific requirements in restarting.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-3
Option
Action
Service Status
Additional way to determine if the service itself is
running. A Service Status of "Running" could
indicate a service that was started. A Service
Status of "Not Running" could indicate a service
that was shut down. A Service Status of "Invalid/
Non Existing Service" could indicate the service is
not registered to the OS. A Service Status of
"WatchDog not running" could indicate that
service monitoring is shutdown. A Service Status
of "Not Monitored" could indicate that the
Monitoring setting is inactivated or that service
monitoring is not set.
Main Window Display Options
The main window Tool and Status bars can be enabled or disabled. From
the menu bar, under View select to enable or disable the tool and status
bars.
The main window application listing can be sorted by selected column.
Click on a column label (OW5000 Application, Host Machine, Monitoring,
Retry Interval, or Service Status) to sort the list by that column.
Alternate selection of the sort column will alternately sort the list in
ascending or descending order.
The main window listing can be further sorted and the display enhanced
for readability.
Step 1
Select View > Options from the main window. A WatchDog Helper
Options dialog box displays (Figure 3-2).
Figure 3-2 WatchDog Helper Options dialog box
The Options dialog box provides the selection of a secondary sort
parameter.
Step 2
Select the secondary column from the Apply secondary sort on dropdown list.
Step 3
The main window listing can be displayed with a different line color for
other service applications for easier readability. Select the Use alternate
colors to display list items box to apply the Multi Color display style.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-4
WatchDog
Step 4
Click OK.
Main Window Toolbar
The main window toolbar (Figure 3-3) provides toolbar buttons to
quickly access the primary WatchDog Helper functions.
Figure 3-3 WatchDog Helper main window toolbar
The seven buttons (left to right) provide quick access to the functions
described in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Main window toolbar
Add Service item
Delete Service item
Update Service item
Stop Service
Start WatchDog
Stop WatchDog
About (Shows the “About This Program”
information)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-5
The functions can also be selected by clicking the right mouse button to
display the context (shortcut) menu (Figure 3-4). Select the desired
function as indicated.
Figure 3-4 WatchDog Helper shortcut menu
These functions are described in detail in the following sections.
Adding a Service
Use the following steps to add a service application for monitoring by
WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Click Tools > Add Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Add Service.
—Click the Add Service
button.
A WatchDog Helper Add Service dialog box displays (Figure 3-5).
Figure 3-5 WatchDog Helper Add Service dialog box
Step 2
Select the desired Host from the drop-down list of available machines in
the Host Machine field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-6
WatchDog
Step 3
Select the OW5000 application to be monitored by WatchDog for the
specific Host Machine from the Installed OW5000 Application field.
If nothing is shown, all the OW5000 applications are already monitored by
WatchDog.
NOTE
NOTE
Step 4
Select the Monitor Service box under Options if WatchDog monitoring
is to be enabled at this time.
Step 5
Enter the Retry Interval (in seconds) for the restart of this application
following a shutdown.
Some applications take longer to completely shut down than others. Selecting a retry
interval that is too short may result in a service race condition where a service may
try to restart before it is completely shut down. This can result in serious problems
with Windows and the services may not start properly.
Step 6
Select the Add button to add the service item, or Cancel to leave this
function without saving your changes. Once an application item is added,
it will then be listed on the WatchDog Helper main window of monitored
service applications.
Deleting a Service
Use the following steps to delete a monitored service application from
WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools > Delete Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Delete Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click the Delete Service
button.
A WatchDog Helper Delete Service dialog box displays (Figure 3-6).
Figure 3-6 WatchDog Helper Delete Service dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-7
The information in the dialog box verifies the service to be removed from
WatchDog monitoring.
Step 2
Click Delete to delete the item.
Updating a Service
Use the following steps to update WatchDog settings for any monitored
service application.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools>Update Service.
—Double click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Update Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Update.
A WatchDog Update Item dialog box displays (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7 WatchDog Update Item dialog box
Step 2
Select or clear the Monitor Service box under Options if you want to
change this choice.
Step 3
If desired, change the Retry Interval (in seconds) for the restart of this
application following a shutdown.
Step 4
Select Update to save the changes.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-8
WatchDog
Stopping a Service
Use the following steps to stop an OW5000 application from WatchDog
Helper.
Step 1
Do one of the following in the main WatchDog Helper window:
—Select OW5000 Application, then click Tools > Stop Service.
—Right-click the name of any OW5000 Application in the main window
and select Stop Service.
—Select OW5000 Application, then click the Stop Service
button. 

A WatchDog Helper dialog box displays verifying the selected service
application to stop. This function can aid in troubleshooting services.
Step 2
NOTE
Click Yes. 

A few seconds after stopping a service, the main window Service Status
for the selected service should indicate 'Not Running'. But, if WatchDog
service is started, after the Retry Interval time is passed, the status will
go back to 'Running'.
A Service can be stopped from the Services window. But if WatchDog service is
running, the service cannot be stopped. To stop the service from the Services
window, stop OWWatchDog first.
If OW5000 Access Server is installed on a separate server, it cannot be monitored by
WatchDog service. Stop the service from the installed server's Service window.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
There is a case that the status of the Access Server keep displaying "Stopping"
when the user tries to stop/restart. In this case, stop the AccessServer.exe from Task
Manager.
When stopping a service for OWTelephony Event Notification and OWOaiServer, the
terminal which has been in a call shows the on-phone status until the on-hook event
is occurred after restart. (non SIP terminal presence feature is used)
Starting WatchDog
Starting WatchDog will enable and start WatchDog monitoring for all
listed service applications. Select Start WatchDog from the menu bar,
toolbar, or click the right mouse button. A few seconds after starting
WatchDog, the main window Service Status should indicate the
current status for each service.
Step 1
In the WatchDog Helper main window, follow one of the options below:
—Click the Start WatchDog button
.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
WatchDog
3-9
—Right-click at the main window and then click WatchDog > Start
Service.
WatchDog can start from Control Panel > Administrative Tools> Services and
then start OWWatchDog service.
NOTE
OW5000 Access Server which is installed in a separate server cannot be monitored
by WatchDog.
NOTE
Stopping WatchDog
WatchDog monitoring can be stopped for all service applications. This
could be useful in application maintenance activities. Select Stop
WatchDog from the menu bar, toolbar, or click the right mouse button.
The main window Service Status should indicate 'WatchDog Not
Running' for all services.
Follow the steps below to stop WatchDog.
Step 1
Do one of following from the WatchDog Helper main window.
—Click the Stop WatchDog button
.
—Right-click in the main window and then select WatchDog > Stop
Service.
WatchDog can be stopped from the Services window. (OWWatchDog service)
NOTE
Exiting WatchDog Helper
Exit the WatchDog Helper application from the menu bar, under the File
menu and select Exit.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
3-10
WatchDog
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-1
4
Log Viewer
Log Viewer is a utility in the UNIVERGE OW5000. OW5000 applications
generally log events to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor). These
logs are then stored into log file.
Log Viewer gives a system administrator the ability to:
• Connect to the OW5000 Log Server, display logged event, and change
the log level.
• Open .LOG files generated by the Log Server to query, filter, and
display their contents.
• Open the current log file which is created by the OW5000 Log Server
and display the Real-time log information.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Log Viewer Support Feature
Starting Log Viewer
Log Viewer Main Window
Standard Query Mode
Print Log Information
Real-time Query Mode
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level
Log File Maintenance
Change Query Mode
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-2
Log Viewer
Log Viewer Support Feature
Log Viewer support features are different based on the environment and
the conditions.
There are two operating environment choices:
• Using Log Viewer on the OW5000 Platform installed server (Local).
• Using Log Viewer on a separate server from the OW5000 Platform
installed server (Remote).
There are two start-up modes available:
• Connecting with the OW5000 Log Server (Log Server)
• Connecting with the OAI.LOG file
#
Features
Local
Remote
Log Server
OAI.LOG
Log Server
OAI.LOG
1
Query/Display current log file
(Standard Query)
X
-
X
-
2
Query/Display saved log file
(Standard Query)
-
X
-
X
3
Filtering by text
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
4
Search by text
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
High light display
(Standard Query)
6
Day Light Saving adjustment
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
7
Display attached data
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
8
Print out event information
(Standard Query)
X
X
X
X
9
Save search result
(Standard Query)
X
-
-
-
10
Bookmark
(Standard Query)
X
-
-
-
11
Query/ Real-time Display current log
file (Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
12
Filtering by text
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
13
Search by text
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
14
High light display
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
15
Day Light Saving adjustment
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
16
Display attached data
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
#
NOTE
Features
Local
4-3
Remote
Log Server
OAI.LOG
Log Server
OAI.LOG
17
Print out event information
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
18
Save search result
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
19
Bookmark
(Real-time Query)
X
-
-
-
20
Change Log Level
X
-
X
-
21
Maintenance Log File
X
-
X
22
Change Query Mode
X
-
X
-
Multiple Log Viewers can be used on the same server. However, it might be a
problem when the Log Viewer configuration is changed. Therefore, do not change
any configurations while multiple Log Viewers are being used.
Starting Log Viewer
Log Viewer connects to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor) or the log
file which was created by the OW5000 Log Server.
Use the following steps to start Log Viewer:
Step 1
From the desktop, click the Start button, and then select All Programs >
NEC OW5000 > Runtime Platform > Log Viewer. A Connect to
OW5000 Log dialog box displays (Figure 4-1).
Figure 4-1 Connect to OW5000 Log dialog box
Step 2
In the Location field, type the name where the Log Server is to connect.

If this is a Local Server, type the OW5000 Platform computer name
where it connects to the OW5000 Log Server.

If this is a Remote Server, type the OW5000 Platform server IP Address
and port number (5690). For example, 127.0.0.1:5690. If the DNS is
available, the OW5000 Platform computer name is available even if it is
a remote server. You can also use the browse button (...) to select a log
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-4
Log Viewer
file or use the drop-down list to display all previously opened machines
and .LOG files in the Location field.
Step 3
Click the Connect button, A Log Viewer Main Window displays if it is
connected successfully. A Connect Failed dialog box displays if it failed
(Figure 4-2).
Step 4
Click OK and try again beginning with Step 2.
Figure 4-2 Connection Failed dialog box
Log Viewer Main Window
Starting the Log Viewer program displays the Log Viewer Main Window,
shown in Figure 4-3. Standard Query mode is applied when the Log
Viewer starts.
From the Log Viewer Main window, you can:
• Specify the applications that are displayed.
• Search the log files for specific information, including events, dates,
and text. See “Searching for Logged Events” on page 4-13, for more
information.
• View log file information. See “Viewing Event Data” on page 4-14, for
more information.
• Print log file information. See “Print Log Information” on page 4-15,
for more information.
• Save query results and bookmark them for easy access. See “Saving
Search Results and Working with Bookmarks” on page 4-16, for more
information.
• In Real-time Query mode, Real-time event information displays. See
“Real-time Query Mode” on page 4-18 for more information.
• Change the application log level. See “Configuration of OW5000
Application Log Level” on page 4-20 for more information.
• Maintenance of log files. See “Log File Maintenance” on page 4-22 for
more information.
• Change query mode between Standard Query mode and Real-time
Query mode. See “Log File Maintenance” on page 4-22 for more
information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-5
Figure 4-3 OW5000 Log Viewer Main window
The Log Viewer window contains the following components:
Title Bar
Displays the name of the application and the name of the OW5000 Log
Server or log file to which Log Viewer is connected.
Figure 4-4 Log Viewer Title Bar
Menu Bar
The menu bar displays at the top of the Log Viewer window and contains
two pull-down menus: File and Help (Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5 Log Viewer Menu Bar
Menu Bar
Each menu item contains various menu options. Each menu item and its
corresponding menu options are described below:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-6
Log Viewer
File Menu
The File menu options are Open Log, Print, Print Setup, and Exit. A brief
description of each option is listed below.
Figure 4-6 File Menu
Open Log
Opens a dialog box which enables you to connect to a specified OW5000
Log Server or .LOG file. When connected to a Log Server, you can view
and configure its log parameters.
Print
Opens the Print dialog box and enables you to print the events that are
currently displayed.
Print Setup
Opens the Print Setup dialog box where you can select your printing
options.
Exit
Closes Log Viewer.
Help Menu
The Help menu option is About OW5000 Log Viewer. A description of
this option is listed below (Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7 Help Menu
About OW5000 Log Viewer
Displays version information for the Log Viewer.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-7
Application Group Box
The Applications Group Box displays the application log sessions so the
user can select a session to perform searches (Figure 4-8). The
Application Group Box displays information for each log session
performed by an application as follows:
Figure 4-8 Application Group Box
Application
The name that the application used for the log session (typically the
name of the application performing the logging).
Start Time
The time of the first event logged by the application for this log session.
Last Logged Time
The time of the last logged event by the application for this log session.
Record Count
Number of records/events logged by the application for this log session.
Applications Displayed Box
The Applications Displayed in the Application Group Box can be altered
so that only the more relevant application log sessions are displayed by
using the controls in the Applications Displayed Box (Figure 4-9).
The Applications Displayed Box is activated only in the Standard Query
Mode. It is deactivated in the Real-time Query Mode.
The controls and their functions are described below:
Figure 4-9 Applications Displayed Box
Logged in the Past XX XXXX
When checked, the user is able to specify the most recent log sessions
by Days, Hours, Minutes or Seconds. If checked, and an application
sessions last log event is not within the specified time, that application
will not be displayed in the Application Group Box.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-8
Log Viewer
Hide Apps With Only Application Headers
When this option is checked, applications are hidden that have not
logged any information, other than the initial Application started logging
message. This is normally checked so that log sessions that have not
logged anything other than the start of the log session are not
displayed.
Connected Only
When checked, applications that currently have a logging session
connected with the OAIMonitor service is displayed. Typically this will be
the applications that are currently running. To see log sessions of
applications that have ended their log session, you must unselect this
option.
Reload App List Button
If an application has started a new log session (which typically happens
when an application starts or restarts), you can reload the applications
in the Application Group Box by clicking on Reload App List to get the
most recent list of applications.
This is available only when the Log Viewer is connected with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Configure...Button
The following functions are available when selecting Configure 
(Figure 4-3).
• Configure event type of applications which are connected to OW5000
Log Server (OAI Monitor.) See “Configuration of OW5000 Application
Log Level” on page 4-20 for more information.
• Configure the maximum file size of OAI.LOG and the maximum
number of files of OAI.LOG which stored in the server. See “Log File
Maintenance” on page 4-22 for more information.
• Backup current OAI.LOG file which is the log file of OW5000 manually.
See Page 4-22 for more information.
• Change query mode between the Standard Query Mode and Real-time
Query mode. Also able to configure the parameter. See Page 4-24 for
more information.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-9
Search Criteria Box
The search criteria box allows you to set the search condition of the
OW5000 application log (Figure 4-10).
The Date, Time, Severity and search text are used as search conditions.
Figure 4-10 Search Criteria Box
Search from Begin/End of File or Relative to Last Search Radio Button
Selecting this option allows the user to search from a point in the file
(beginning, end, or from the last search position). The following types of
relative searches are available:
Last
Backward search starting from the end of the file.
First
Forward search starting from the beginning of the file.
Previous
Backward search starting from the first record displayed on the
previous search.
Next
Forward search starting from the last record displayed on the previous
search.
Include Previous
Same as Previous except the current search results are not cleared.
The new search results are inserted in front of the current search
results.
Include Next
Same as Next except the current search results are not cleared. The
new search results are appended to the end of the current search
results.
The range can be specified by either a time range or number of records.
HH:MM:SS
Indicates the range to be displayed specified by the number of Hours,
Minutes and Seconds from the first record displayed.
Records
Indicates the number of records to be displayed.
This will override the Max. Number of Results in the Application Log Properties
dialog box—Maintenance tab. This is deactivated when in Real-time Query Mode.
NOTE
Selecting Search by Begin Time Radio Button allows the user to
search by specifying a begin time. The end of the search can be
specified by one of the following ways:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-10
Log Viewer
Figure 4-11 Search by Begin Time
End Time
Indicates the user will specify the absolute end date and time for the
search.
Record Count
Indicates the user will specify the number of records that the search
will display.
End Time Span
Indicates the user will specify how many Hours, Minutes, and Seconds
past the Begin Time that the End Time will be for the search.
This will override the Max. Number of Results in the Application Log Properties
dialog box—Maintenance tab. This is deactivated when in Real-time Query Mode.
NOTE
Severity Box
The Setting Severity Box allows the user to select search conditions
based on an event type. There are 4 types of events; such as Debug,
Information, Warning, and Error. The user can set the type per
selected application.
Filter Field
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase (Figure 4-12).
Figure 4-12 Filter Field
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the
information in the attached data.
Daylight Saving Time Check Box
Setting this parameter allows the user to adjust Daylight Savings Time.
Start Time and Last Logged Time in the Application Group box, and Time
in the Event Display Area are the target of this adjustment.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-11
Start Search Button
Clicking the Start Search button allows the user to start the search
using search conditions which are assigned in the Search Criteria for
application(s) assigned in the Application Group Box. Search results
displayed in the Event Display Area and the total event number is
displayed in the search result display area per event type.
Start Auto Refresh Button
Clicking the Start Auto Refresh Button allows the user to start a Realtime display. It is deactivated when in the Standard Query Mode.
Search Results Display Area
The total number of events information is displayed in this area for each
event type (Figure 4-13).
Figure 4-13 Search Result Display Area
Find Field
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box to find a specific word or phrase in
a log file (Figure 4-14).
Figure 4-14 Find Field
Step 2
The specific word is highlighted in yellow by clicking the ON button.
Step 3
Clicking the right or left arrow allows you to scroll through the display to
reach the next target event.

Log Viewer searches above or below the currently selected log event,
depending on the arrow you select.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-12
Log Viewer
Event Information Display Area
The Event Information Display Area displays the searched event
information (Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15 Event Information Display Area
Time
The Time when the application event happened
Severity
Event Type
Application
Name of log session for the application
Description
Description of log information
Data
Data size for the event
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-13
Standard Query Mode
The Standard Query Mode allows the user to search and display the
event information.
• Connect to the OW5000 Log Server to search and display the logged
events which have been logged when the Start Search was clicked.
• Open the log file created by the OW5000 Log Server to search and
display the logged events.
Searching for Logged Events
Use the following items to filter a search of logged events in the Log
Viewer.
• the application
• the time period
• the log file severity type - such as Debug, Information, Warning,
or Error
• Text Filter
Starting a Search
NOTE
Step 1
Select the application whose files you want to search from the
Application group box. To select more than one application, hold down
the Ctrl key while you click each application.
Step 2
Set the search time period from Search from Begin/End of File or
Relative to Last Search or Search by Begin Time.
Step 3
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, Error.
Step 4
If you are searching for a particular event, extension, or pattern, type this
text in the Filter field.
Step 5
Click the Start Search button to begin searching the log files. Search
results are displayed in the Event Information Display Area, also the total
number of Debug, Information, Warning and Error events are displayed
in the Search Result Display Area.
If the data for a given time period seems incomplete, check the Max Number of
Results on the Configure > Maintenance tab. It is possible that more entries exist
for this time period, but the logged entries exceed the maximum number of results
configured. To solve this problem, either issue another query where the Start Time
begins from the point where the last entry leaves off, or increase the Max Number of
Results.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-14
Log Viewer
Searching Logged Events for Specific Test
Once the list of logged events is displayed, you can search or filter the
list for a specific word or phrase.
Finding a specific word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box to find a specific word or phrase in
a log file. Click ON button if the highlighted word/phrase displays.
Step 2
Click the Prev or Next arrow to scroll through the log events. Log Viewer
searches above or below the currently selected log event, depending on
the arrow you select.
Filtering the list for a word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase.
Step 2
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the information
in the attached data.
Step 3
Click the Start Search button to begin the search. The log events, from
your search containing the specified word or phrase, are displayed.
Viewing Event Data
If data is attached to a log event, the size of the data displays in the
Data column of the box displaying the logs. To view data attached to a
log event, double-click the desired logged event that contains attached
data. The data and a brief description of the data is displayed in a list
box.
Reload Application List
If an application has started a new log session (which typically happens
when an application starts or restarts) you can reload the applications in
the Application Group Box by clicking on Reload App List to get the
most recent list of applications.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-15
Print Log Information
Once the list of logged events is displayed, you can print one or more
log events from the Logs tab.
To print one or more log events:
Step 1
To select more than one log event, hold down the Ctrl key to select each
event or hold down the Shift key to select a range of events.
Step 2
Click File > Print from the menu bar. Figure 4-16 displays.
Figure 4-16 Print Log Query Results dialog box
Step 3
Select the printer Name that you want to use.
Step 4
To print the binary data as well as the log event, select the Print binary
data associated with events checkbox.
Step 5
To print warnings in bold, select the Warnings in Bold checkbox.
Step 6
To print errors in bold, select the Errors in Bold checkbox.
Step 7
Click OK. The selected log events print.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-16
Log Viewer
Saving Search Results and Working with Bookmarks
Log Viewer allows you to save the results of a query to a text file, to set
a bookmark in the results, and to jump to a bookmark once it is set. To
use these features, click the right mouse button on the results of a
query to open a shortcut menu with the save results, and bookmark
options (Figure 4-17).
Figure 4-17 Log Viewer Shortcut menu
Saving Query Results
Use the following steps to save the results of a query to a text file.
Step 1
Select the log event(s) to be saved. To select more than one log event,
hold down the Ctrl key to select each event, or hold down the Shift key
to select a range of events.
Step 2
Click the right mouse button on the result(s) selected to open the
shortcut menu (Figure 4-17), and then do one of the following:
—Select Save Results with Event Data As to save the Log Events and
Log Event Data of the search results.
—Select Save Results without Event Data As to save only the Log
Events of the search results. 

Refer to “Viewing Event Data” on page 4-14, for more information on
Event Data.
Step 3
Click Save.
Creating a Bookmark
Use the following steps to create a Bookmark:
Step 1
Click the right mouse button on the desired log event to set a bookmark.
A shortcut menu opens.
Step 2
Select Add Bookmark. An Add Bookmark dialog box displays 
(Figure 4-18).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-17
Figure 4-18 Add Bookmark dialog box
Step 3
Enter the name of the bookmark and click OK. The new bookmark is
saved and displayed in the Bookmarks on the shortcut menu 
(Figure 4-19).
Opening a Bookmark
A Bookmark is available only when the query result is displayed.
NOTE
Use the following steps to open a Bookmark.
Step 1
Select the Bookmarks from the shortcut menu to go to an existing
bookmark.
Step 2
Select the desired bookmark. The log results will scroll so that the
bookmarked event is visible and selected (Figure 4-19).
Figure 4-19 Selecting a Created Bookmark
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-18
Log Viewer
Real-time Query Mode
Real-time Query Mode allows the user to search event information and
display the information in the event window. Connecting with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor) displays the event information after
the time set for Start Auto Refresh is clicked.
Real-time display of event information
Use the following items to filter a search of logged events in the Log
Viewer.
• the application
• the log file severity type, such as Debug, Information, Warning, or
Error
• Text Filter
Start/Stop search
NOTE
Step 1
Click the Configure button. After an Application Log Properties dialog
box displays, click the Maintenance tab.
Step 2
Click the Real-time Query radio button, configure the Max. Number of
Lines (if required), and then click OK.
Step 3
Select the application whose files you want to search from the
Application group box. To select more than one application, hold down
the Ctrl key while you click each application.
Step 4
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, or Error.
Step 5
If you are searching for a particular event, extension, or pattern, type this
text in the Filter field.
Step 6
Start the event information search by clicking the Start Auto Refresh
button. The searched event information will be displayed in the event
information display area. The total number of the following will display in
the Search result display area, Debug, Information, Warning and Error.
Step 7
Click the Stop Auto Refresh button to stop the Real-time display.
You cannot change the search application during the Real-time display. To change
the application, stop the Real-time display, change the search application, and then
click the Start Auto Refresh button.
When the total number of lines displayed in the event information display area
exceeds the Max. Number of Lines, which is assigned using the Maintenance tab,
the oldest information in the event display area is deleted.
If the OAI.LOG file reaches the maximum file size, the Real-time display will not
continue the back up process.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-19
Real-time display is available only for the application which is connected with the
OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor), and also displayed in the Application Group box.
NOTE
Finding a Specific Word or Phrase
Once the list of logged events are displayed, you can search or filter the
list for a specific word or phrase. To find a specific word or phrase in a
log file, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Find box.
Step 2
Click the Prev or Next arrow to scroll through the log events. Log Viewer
searches above or below the currently selected log event, depending on
the arrow you selected.
Filtering the list for a word or phrase
Step 1
Type a word or phrase in the Filter field to filter the list for a word or
phrase.
Step 2
Select the Also filter data check box if you want to filter the information
in the attached data.
Step 3
Click the Start Search button to begin the search. The log events from
your search that contain the specified word or phrase displays.

All events display when pressing the Enter key. You do not need a value
in Filter field.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-20
Log Viewer
Configuration of OW5000 Application Log Level
OW5000 Log Viewer allows a user to set or change an event type of the
application that is connected to the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Step 1
Click the Configure button in the Log Viewer Main Window 
(Figure 4-3). Figure 4-20 displays.
This feature is available only when the Log Viewer is connected to the OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
NOTE
Figure 4-20 Application Log Properties dialog box—Applications tab
Application Name Box
Displays the Application names that are connected to OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
Applications Displayed Box
Using this configuration, applications strongly related to the OW5000
only will display.
Connected Only
This check box is available only when the application is connected with
the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
When selected, only the applications that have a current log session
with the OW5000 Log Server (OAIMonitor) will be displayed. Usually
these applications get together with the applications which are currently
working. To display all applications, this check box should be
unchecked.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-21
Hide Apps With Only Application Headers
If this check box is checked, the applications that do not have an event
log will be hidden in the event information display area.
Severity Filter Box
The Severity Filter allows the user to set or change the display event
type of the applications selected in the Application Name box. There are
four event types (Debug, Information, Warning and Error) and can
be selected per application. Unchecked events are not logged nor
displayed in the event information display area.
Click Apply to save the configuration. The selected event type
configuration will be applied after this process in the log file (OAI.LOG),
which is created by the OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Change Log Level Process
Select the application name from the Application Name box. The
current configuration of the selected application will display in the
Severity box. To select more than one application, hold down the Ctrl
key while you click each application. In this case, the last application
configuration displays.
Select one or more checkboxes in the Severity type group box: Debug,
Information, Warning, or Error.
Click Apply or OK. The same configuration is applied if more than one
application is selected.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-22
Log Viewer
Log File Maintenance
The OW5000 Log Viewer allows the user to maintain a log file that is
created by OW5000 Log Server (OAI Monitor).
Step 1
Click the Configure button in Log Viewer Main Window (Figure 4-3).
Step 2
Click the Maintenance tab. Figure 4-21 displays.
Figure 4-21 Application Log Properties dialog box—Maintenance tab
Logfile Parameters Box
The Logfile Parameter Box allows the user to set a maximum log file size
(OAI.LOG), and a maximum number of files stored in the disk. You can
also create a manual backup.
The required maximum log file size can be changed based on the
feature and traffic. Choose the proper settings based on the servers’
available disk size and backup period of the log file.
This feature is available only when Log Viewer is connected to the OW5000 Log
Server (OAI Monitor).
NOTE
Maximum Log Size (MB) Field
Configure maximum file size of OAI.lOG (MB)
The Default is 50MB and it is configurable between 1MB and 1024MB.
The configuration is applied when the Apply button is clicked. The
Backup file name format is OAI_MMDDYYYY_HHMMSSmmm.Log.

(MM:month, DD:day, YYYY:year, HH:hour, MM:minute, SS:second,
mmm:millisecond)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-23
The OAI.LOG file is stored in OW5000 Platform install folder. For
example, C:\Program Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\
The Underline(_) is the path which is selected during OW5000 Platform
install step.
Backup files are stored in following path.
C:\Program Files\NEC\OW5000\Runtime Platform\archive
Maximum Log Files Field
Configure the maximum number of backup files.
The Default value is 2 and it is configurable between 2 to 999.
The Configuration is applied when the Apply button is clicked. The
oldest file is deleted when the backup files reach this maximum value.
Backup Current Log Button
Click this button to backup the OAI.LOG file manually. The Backup file is
stored in the backup file folder as:
M_OAI_MMDDYYYY_HHMMSSmmm.LOG file format.
(MM:month, DD:day, YYYY:year, HH:hour, MM:minute, SS:second,
mmm:millisecond)
The following step is for a manual backup.
Step 1
Click Backup Current Log button. Figure 4-22 displays.
Figure 4-22 Delete Log File dialog box
Step 2
Click OK to delete the log file or Cancel to suspend this process. 

Figure 4-23 displays, with the stored file path information, when a backup
is successful. If the backup fails, a Delete Log File—Delete NG dialog
box displays. Try executing again at a later time.
Figure 4-23 Delete Log File—Backup Copy dialog box
If the backup fails, a Delete Log File—Delete NG dialog displays. Try
again after a short period.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-24
Log Viewer
Change Query Mode
The OW5000 Log Viewer allows a user to change the query mode by
clicking the Configure button in the Log Viewer Main Window 
(Figure 4-3). An Application Log Properties dialog box displays.
Step 1
Click the Maintenance tab.
Standard/Real-time Query Configuration Box
Select Standard Query Mode or Real-time Query mode as the Log
Viewer query mode.
The following configurations are available for each mode.
Standard Query Radio Button
Select this options if the Standard Query mode is used.
This mode is selected when Log Viewer starts up.
Max. Number of Results Field
Set the maximum events number which displays in the Event
Information Display Area when in Standard Query Mode.
Click Apply after the proper value is set in the Max. Number of Results
field.
The default value is 500 and it is configurable between 1 and
4294967295.
Entering smaller numbers will allow users to view the query results
faster. However, if the time period of a search is too short, the desired
results may not be viewable due to the volume of events within the time
specified in the query. If this happens, either increase this number to
the desired size or narrow the window of time to retrieve fewer
matches.
Real-time Query Radio Button
Select if Real-time Query mode is used.
Real-time Query mode is available only when the Log Viewer is used on
the OW5000 platform server.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Log Viewer
4-25
Max. Number of Lines Field
Set the maximum events number which displays in the Event
Information Display Area in Real-time Query Mode.
Click Apply after the proper value is set in the Max. Number of Lines
field.
The default value is 500 and it is configurable between 1 and
4294967295.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
4-26
Log Viewer
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-1
5
IM Archive Viewer
IM Archive Viewer is the application to manage IM (Instant Message)
archive files created by OW5000. The System Administrator can open
single or multiple IM archive files and query by the following conditions:
• Beginning Date/Time and End Date/Time
• Sender SIPURI/Receiver SIPURI
• Keyword in the message text
• Delivered or not
This application can also search specific key words from a query result
and save it into a local file.
This chapter includes the following topics.
Chapter Topics:
• Starting IM Archive Viewer
• Using IM Archive Viewer
Starting IM Archive Viewer
Please follow the steps below to start IM Archive Viewer.
Step 1
Select Start > All Programs > NEC OW5000 > IM Archive Viewer >
OW5000 IM Archive Viewer. A Choose Archive Files dialog box
displays (Figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1 Choose Archive Files dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-2
IM Archive Viewer
NOTE
Step 2
Click the Add button to add IM archive files into the Archive Files field.
IM archive files can be added into this field using drag and drop. Note
that the total size of IM archive files must be less than 500 MB.
Step 3
Enter the password, which is specified by OW5000 Administrator to
create an archive, in the Password field and click Open. After decrypting
the archive files, Figure 5-2 displays.
The Password for the IM Archive files is specified using OW5000 Administrator:
OW5000 > Instant Messages > Configuration page—IM Archiving Password
parameter.
If added files require a different password, the IM Archive Viewer decrypts the files
that use the specified password.
NOTE
Figure 5-2 IM Archive Viewer Main Window
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
IM Archive Viewer
5-3
Using IM Archive Viewer
IM Archive Viewer can show IM information from the archive files by
specifying a condition. If a condition is not specified, the entire IM log is
shown.
The following topics are included in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Specifying a Search Condition
Displaying IM Information
Saving IM Logs to a File
Daylight Saving Time
Keyword Searching from IM Text
Exiting IM Archive Viewer
Specifying a Search Condition
Use the following parameters to search the IM Archive Viewer log.
Begin date/time, End date/time
This parameter specifies the period of the IM log. To specify the period,
check each parameter then set the date time.
The Begin parameter shows the date/time of the first IM log and the
End parameter shows the last IM log in the archive as default.
From URI To URI
Search by a specified SIPURI from the archive file. This parameter is
case insensitive.
Message text
Search by a specified Message text from the archive file. This
parameter is case insensitive.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-4
IM Archive Viewer
Delivered flag
Select from Both, True or False. Each parameter searches by
message, whether it is delivered or not.
Both: Search both delivered and undelivered IM
True: Search delivered IM only
False: Search undelivered IM only
Displaying IM Information
IM logs, specified by a search condition, are listed in the IM information
fields (Figure 5-3).
Figure 5-3 IM Information Fields
Saving IM Logs to a File
Search results can be saved as a local file. To save the logs, select the
desired IM logs to save and click Save Result. To select multiple logs,
click the desired logs using the CTRL key.
To select all logs, click in the left top of the list.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
IM Archive Viewer
5-5
The Saved file is in CSV format and stores each field name and the IM
information.
The Saved file is not encrypted. IM Archive Viewer cannot open saved CSV file.
NOTE
Daylight Saving Time
By checking the Daylight Saving Time box, the date/time information of
the search result is shifted as daylight savings time.
Keyword Searching from IM Text
The IM Archive Viewer can find an IM log by keyword using the search
option.
Step 1
Enter the desired word to search in the Find field and click OK. IM
Archive Viewer queries the search and highlights the word in yellow if the
word is found.
Figure 5-4 IM Search Results
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
5-6
IM Archive Viewer
Step 2
Use the right allow button to jump to the next keyword and the left allow
button to jump to the previous keyword.
Step 3
Click Off to cancel the keyword search.
Exiting IM Archive Viewer
Step 1
Click the X button on the IM Archive Viewer to exit.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-1
6
Database Operations
DBTool is a utility in the OW5000 Platform in OW5000 R4. It provides a
system administrator the capability to import and export data between
the OW5000 databases and text files. The OW5000 Master database can
be populated in a number of ways, including OW5000 Administrator and
DBTool.
The following topics are included in this chapter.
Chapter Topics:
•
•
•
•
OW5000 Administrator
DBTool (Database Import/Export)
DBTool
Data Mapping Quick Reference Tables
OW5000 Administrator
OW5000 Administrator is part of the OW5000 Runtime Platform.
“Maintaining the OW5000 Directory” on page 2-69 describes how to use
OW5000 Administrator to enter and maintain records in the database.
DBTool (Database Import/Export)
The DBTool allows data to be imported and exported into OW5000
databases. Specifically, this tool imports Extension, License, Location,
Organization, Person, Route/Trunk, States/Provinces and SIPUA Group
data records from a text file into the specified OW5000 database (also
LDAP can be a source for import). The data fields can be mapped to
existing database fields. The configuration and field mapping settings
can be saved as a profile, so these operations can be easily repeated
manually for later single or repeated occurrences.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-2
Database Operations
Database Backup
It is recommended that you backup the database in the event that data
is imported incorrectly.
If you want to make a backup, you have to backup both "master" and "OW5000".
As for the "master" database, you should make a backup when you install/upgrade
OW5000. Frequent backups are not necessary.
IMPORTANT
Backed up data can be reused (restored) only when the same version of the
OW5000 Platform is used with the same computer name and the same IP address.
IMPORTANT
Data before a version upgrade cannot be used when the OW5000 Platform is
upgraded, so backup the data again after the version upgrade.
Use the following steps to backup the OW5000 database.
Step 1
Log into the server where SQL Server 2005/2008 is in operation using an
account that has Administrator rights.
Step 2
Click the Start button on the desktop, and then select All Programs >
Accessory > Command Prompt to enter the command below.

In the following example, connection is made to the default instance
name, SQLEXPRESS, of SQL Server 2005/2008 Express Edition.

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Binn 

SQL Server 2008 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL
Server\MSSQL10.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\Binn

C:sqlcmd -S (local)\SQLEXPRESS
1>BACKUP DATABASE OW5000
2>TO DISK='ow5000.bak'
3>GO
Step 3
After completing the backup, enter exit to end the SQLCMD command.

1>exit

A backup file (ow5000.bak) is stored in the Backup folder of SQL Server
2005/2008. The backup file is stored in the following folder:

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\ Backup\

To create an OW5000 database backup in another location, specify the
storage destination as follows:

SQL Server 2008 Express Edition case
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\ Backup\

2> TO DISK='D:\sqlbackup\ow5000.bak'
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-3
To backup the master database, run the following command.

1> BACKUP DATABASE master
2> TO DISK='master.bak'
3> GO
Database Restore
By restoring a backup file, the OW5000 database can be restored to the
same database condition as when the backup was created.
Backed up data can be reused (restored) only when the same version of the
OW5000 Platform is used with the same computer name and the same IP address.
IMPORTANT
Data before a version upgrade cannot be used when the OW5000 Platform is
upgraded, so backup the data again after the version upgrade.
Use the following steps to restore the OW5000 database:
Step 1
Log into a server where the OW5000 Platform is in operation using an
account that has Administrator rights.
Step 2
Click the Start button on the desktop, and select Control Panel >
Administrative Tool > Services to stop the following services in the
Service window. Use the order listed below.
• OWWatch Dog
• OW OAIMonitor*
• OWAccessServer (only when this is installed. Also, stop
Access Server installed in another server.)
• Remote Call Control (only when this is installed)
• World Wide Web Publishing Service
* Other related services are also stopped.
Step 3
End the Database Import Tool and Database Export Tool when they are
started.
Step 4
Log into the server where the SQL Server 2005/2008 is in operation,
using an account that has Administrator rights.
Step 5
Click the Start button on the desktop, and then select All Programs >
Accessory > Command Prompt to enter the following command. 

In the following example, connection is made to the default instance
name, SQLEXPRESS, of SQL Server 2005/2008 Express Edition using
NT Authentication.

SQL Server 2005 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Binn 

SQL Server 2008 Express Edition case, move to following folder
C:\Program Files\Microsft SQL
Server\MSSQL10.SQLEXPRESS\MSSQL\Binn
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-4
Database Operations
C:sqlcmd -S (local)\SQLEXPRESS
1>USE master
2>GO
Enter the following command to delete the OW5000 database:
1>DROP DATABASE OW5000
2>GO
After deleting the database, enter the following command to restore the
OW5000 database.
1>RESTORE DATABASE OW5000
2>FROM DISK='ow5000.bak'
3>GO
Step 6
After restoring the database, enter the following command to enable
Service Broker:
1> ALTER DATABASE OW5000 SET ENABLE_BROKER
2> GO
Step 7
Enter exit after the restore is completed.
1> exit
Step 8
Start the services listed below, in the following order, on a server where
the OW5000 Platform is in operation.
• World Wide Web Publishing Service
• OWWatch Dog
• OAI Monitor
• OWAccessServer (when installed on another server)
• Remote Call Control (when installed on another server)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-5
DBTool
The DBTools application provides OW5000 customers the ability to
import and export data to and from the OW5000 Database. The
application combines functionality from the former DBImport and
DBExport tools into a single application. DBTool has a separate installer and
is able to install into a non-OW5000 platform server.
An Import/Export file can be viewed at a remote PC, but the schedule will fail if the
OW5000 system cannot access the file.
NOTE
Available parameter validation is described in the “Specifications for OW5000
Admin” on page Appendix C-1.
NOTE
Step 1
After clicking DBTool, the following login dialog box displays 
(Figure 6-1).
Figure 6-1 DBTool Login dialog box
Step 2
Enter the information, as described in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 DBTool Login fields
Field
OW5000 Server/IP Address
Description
The OW5000 server in which to connect.
User Name
User name for OW5000.
Note: DBTool privileges is required for the user. Refer to “User
Management Configuration” on page 2-100.
Password
The Password for OW5000.
Connect
Validates the information and connects and closes the form to open
another.
PBX configuration from OW5000 Administrator must be completed before starting
the DBTool.
NOTE
Step 3
Click Connect. A DBTool Main Screen displays (Figure 6-2).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-6
Database Operations
Figure 6-2 DBTool Main Screen
DBTool provides the following feature set:
• Import
Imports data from the text file or LDAP. Refer to “Import Data” on
page 6-6 for more information.
• Export
Exports data from the OW5000 database to a text file. Refer to
“Export Data” on page 6-33 for more information.
• Admin
The user is able to selectively delete Persons (by Role), Contact
Methods, and all other types available for Import/Export. Refer to
“Admin” on page 6-36 for more information.
• Help
Indicates the version and database information. See “Help” on
page 6-39.
Import Data
Figure 6-3 shows the data import flow using the DBTool. In OW5000 R5,
the DBTool supports 10 import types. Both the file and LDAP are
available as an import source. Using the Settings configuration, the
DBTool can create default input values based on the definitions.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-7
Figure 6-3 Data Flow using DBTool
l
Import Procedure
Use the following procedures to Import data. Note that the Database
Import Tool cannot import all the items that can be set with OW5000
Administrator. Some settings differ depending on the functions to be
used.
Please assign the PBX and Access Server information in order to import the Person
data correctly from DBTool.
IMPORTANT
Table 6-2 DBTool Import Procedure
Number
Import Type
Dependency
1
Extension
None
2
License
Extension
3
Location
Extension
4
Organization
Extension, Location
5
Organization/Location
Hierarchy
Extension, Location
6
SIPUA Group
None
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Note
6-8
Database Operations
Number
Import Type
Dependency
7
Person
Extension, Location
Organization, and SIPUA
Group
8
Calendar Link
Person
9
States/Provinces
None
10
Route/Trunk
None
Note
Available except for US
market and when UC700/
MC550 is installed.
Creating a New Profile
In OW5000 R5, a profile is not required when a user wants to import the
data using DBTool. However, by using this profile, the user does not
need to configure the mapping every time. DBTool allows the user to
confirm the mapping and save the information as profile data, or cancel
the settings when closing the tool or session.
Opening a Profile
Once the user creates a profile, anyone with DBTool privileges can open
the profile by selecting Open from File > Open > Import 
(Figure 6-4).
Figure 6-4 Open Profile dialog box
Table 6-3 Profile fields
Field
Profile
Description
List of profiles already created for import.
When you select New or load profile from the database, the following
import main screen displays (Figure 6-4).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-9
Figure 6-5 DBTool Import Screen
NOTE
Before importing Person data, set the Office Code(PBX Id) using the PBX
Management > PBX Settings page and entering the Server Name using the
Access Server page. If the SIP Presence feature is not used, the Access Server
name information is not required.
Select Import Type
Select the target import type from the Import Type drop-down menu.
(All unsaved mapping data will be cleared). Some Import Types, related
to the application, may not display if the application is not installed on
the server.
Select Source Import File
Click Source link on the main page. A Profile Import Source dialog displays
(Figure 6-6).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-10
Database Operations
Figure 6-6 Profile Import Source dialog
Table 6-4 Create Profile fields
Field
Description
Source
Select the import source. This can be File or LDAP.
The full path, including the file name, of the file that will be imported.
If you use the Scheduler functionality, you must save the import file.
Input File
The following delimiters are available as an import file:
• Comma (,)
Column Delimiter
• Pipe (I)
• Space
• Tab
Delimiter is automatically detected once the input file is selected.
Use Quoted Field
Select this option if a double quotation mark (“) is used in the import
file. This is checked by default. If your selected file has double
quotation marks, this check box is checked automatically.
When LDAP is selected as the Source, LDAP related configurations are
required, as described in the section below.
LDAP
OW5000 DBTool LDAP Integration synchronizes the OW5000 directory
to an LDAP compliant directory, making it possible for an LDAP
compliant directory to be the source of employee directory data used in
the OW5000 directory. This eliminates the need for employee data
administration of the OW5000 server, as it automatically gets updated
information from the directory server. The LDAP Integration application
can load all data from the LDAP compliant directory, or changes since
the last synchronization if this feature is supported by the LDAP server.
OW5000 DBTool LDAP Integration lets administrators specify an LDAP
source to populate the OW5000 directory of employees and external to
populate the OW5000 directory of employees and external numbers.
Because the structure and elements of an LDAP directory can vary, a
user interface is provided for entering specific queries to retrieve key
data elements from the LDAP server. After the discovery process,
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-11
returned fields can then be mapped to OW5000 fields. If supported by
the LDAP server (only LDAP V.3 is supported), queries can be formulated
to only get records that have been added or modified in a given time
interval since the query was last run.
The LDAP source name, query, and mapping can be saved and
scheduled through web-based OW5000 Administrator to run at
designated recurrent times. There is no limit to the recurrence. The
query can be run as often as once a minute or as little as once a quarter.
Because the LDAP source, query, mapping, and scheduling are stored as
a unit, it is possible to gather OW5000 data from multiple LDAP sources
or queries and schedule these queries independently.
Any LDAP v.3 compliant server will work as an OW5000 DbTool source,
including the following:
— IBM Tivoli Directory Server
— IBM Lotus Notes/Domino
— Microsoft Active Directory
— Microsoft Exchange Server
— Microsoft ADAM
— Novell eDirectory
Configuring LDAP
The LDAP menu is available when LDAP is selected as the source in the
Profile Import Source dialog box (Figure 6-6).
NOTE
In order to use LDAP, you must register the LDAP license. Please refer to the
OW5000 installation Guide for more details. A license is not required for the Asian
and Russian market.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-12
Database Operations
Figure 6-7 LDAP Configuration dialog box
To connect with the LDAP source, the following LDAP Server settings are
required.
•
•
•
•
LDAP Server
Base DN
Other Settings
Search Filter
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-13
LDAP Server
Use the information below to set the LDAP server information. The
Username and Password is for the LDAP server, not OW5000.
Figure 6-8 LDAP Server dialog box
Table 6-5 LDAP Server fields
Field
Description
Host
The computer name of the LDAP server.
Port
The port number that the LDAP server is listening on for
connections. The default is port number 389.
Username/Password
The user name and password to connect LDAP server for the query.
Test
Try to connect LDAP server. Connection successful is displayed
on the bottom of the window in green if it is connected.
Base DN
Figure 6-9 Base DN dialog box
Table 6-6 Base DN fields
Field
Description
Base distinguished name
The distinguished name (DN) that identifies the starting point of a
search.
Fetch NDs
Press the Fetch DNs button to discover possible Base DN’s.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-14
Database Operations
Other Settings
Figure 6-10 Other Settings dialog box
Table 6-7 Other Settings fields
Field
Description
Denotes the date and time the last import occurred. If "Use Last
Import Time in Search" is checked, the Search Filter will
automatically be altered so that only those records changed since
Use Last Import Time in Search the last import will be returned from the query. This option uses
Microsoft's Active Directory "modify Time Stamp" operational
attribute.
Indicates whether or not an import is currently being performed. Two
simultaneous searches for the same profile cannot occur because
an import will check this setting first before performing the search.
WARNING: Modifying this setting may result in overlapping
searches.
Import Status
Search Filter
Figure 6-11 Search Filter dialog box
Table 6-8 Search Filter fields
Field
Description
Search Filter
Enter a valid LDAP search filter. For example, to search for all users
in Active Directory, enter
"(&(objectcategory=person)(objectclass=user))."
e Directory "modify Time Stamp" operational attribute.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-15
For more information about forming LDAP search filters, please refer to the article
RFC2254.
NOTE
Step 1
After entering all required configurations, press Search to discover which
attribute lists are available for the specified LDAP server. Next, select the
list of attributes for the desired import. If no attribute strings were
returned by the search, contact your LDAP directory administrator.
Step 2
Provide the necessary information in each section as described below.
Table 6-9 Search fields
Field
Description
Available Attributes
A list of fields in the LDAP directory that the user has not selected to
import.
Selected Attributes
A list of fields in the LDAP directory that will be imported and shown
in the DBTool GUI. This list will vary depending on the LDAP server
directory structure. Select the list of attributes appropriate for the
desired import.
Step 3
Click OK to add the new profile.
If you cannot find the attribute string, please contact the LDAP Directory
Administrator.
NOTE
Mapping Import Fields
The Data shown in Figure 6-12, displays an example of field mapping
from an import file to the OW5000 Database.
After selecting fields within the list of Source Field, select fields to be
mapped in the list of Database Fields, right click, and then click the Bind
button to perform the field mapping between the Source Field and the
OW5000 Database. Clicking the Bind All icon on the top left enables
batch mapping of fields whose name corresponds.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-16
Database Operations
To cancel mapping, select the field from the Database Fields list, right
click, and then click Unbind. Clicking the UnBind All icon, on the top
right, enables batch cancellation of mapping. Existing mappings are
unaffected when Bind All is selected.
Figure 6-12 Example of Import Field Mapping dialog box
Table 6-10 Import Field Mapping
Icon
Description
Attempts to bind Source Fields to DataBase Fields by matching
names.
Removes all the bindings between Source Fields and DataBase
Fields.
Indicates that the associated field must be mapped.
Starts the importing.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-17
Database Import Tool Functions
The following sections describe the functions of the Database import
tool. The Database import tool can be configured from the Settings page
and other parameters, which might be different depending on the
import type.
Calendar Link
General
To import settings from Calendar Link, select Setting > General. Figure
6-13 displays.
Figure 6-13 Calendar Link Settings
Table 6-11 Calendar Link Settings fields
Field
Description
PBX
PBX for the Exchange Server
Exchange Server
Exchanger Server for the data
Extensions
General
To import extensions from Calendar Link, select Setting > Extensions.
Figure 6-14 displays.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-18
Database Operations
Figure 6-14 Calendar Link Extension Settings
Table 6-12 Extension Settings fields
Group
Description
PBX
If a PBX is not specified when an Extension and person are imported, a
default value, selected here, is used.
Wireless PBX
Not used in this version
Extension Derivation
Extension derivation rules can be created, deleted, or applied using the
Extension Derivation Rule.
Step 1
Click Setting > Derivation Rules. An Extension Derivation Rules List
dialog box displays (Figure 6-15).
Figure 6-15 Extension Derivation Rules List dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-19
Table 6-13 Extension Derivation fields
Field
Description
Edit the rule which is already created.
Delete the rule which is already created.
Applied
Check the rule which should be applied. Top rule is applied as
highest priority rule.
Changes the priority of the applied rule.
Step 2
To create new rules, click the Add New button on the rules list page 
(Figure 6-15). An Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions
dialog box displays (Figure 6-16).
Figure 6-16 Assign or Create Derivation Rules for Extensions dialog box
Table 6-14 Extension Derivation fields
Field
Rule
Description
Rule name of this derivation rule.
Begins with
The target extension which begins with the value set in this edit box.
Use Last Digits
The number of available digits to use from the source number,
starting at the end. If the digits of the Extension is smaller than the
"Begins with" field value plus the "Use Last Digits" field value, the
Extension Derivation rule does not match.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-20
Database Operations
Field
NOTE
Description
Prefix
Optional prefix to add to the beginning of the number.
PBX
If the Rule matches, the PBX which is selected from this drop-down
is applied. This drop-down list shows the PBXs that were assigned
using OW5000 Administrator.
The PBX selected in this dialog box is used as the inserted value, not the query
parameter. The OfficeCode is selected as a mapping parameter. If the extension
matches this rule, this PBX is used as the OfficeCode.
If the imported Extension does not exist in the OW5000 Database, the DBTool
decides on the PBX, based on the Extension Derivation Rule.
NOTE
If the imported Extension exists in the OW5000 Database, the current Extension in
the database is deleted and DBTool decides the PBX, based on the Extension
Derivation Rule.
Extension of URI Derivation means Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Extension.
NOTE
URI Derivation
Clicking the URI Derivation button on the Import Settings dialog box
(Figure 6-17) opens a URI Derivation dialog box (Figure 6-16).
Figure 6-17 URI Derivation dialog box
Table 6-15 URI Derivation fields
Field
Description
Add New
When you click Add New to create a new rule, the field is cleared to
be able to create a new rule. The value cleared is not saved.
OK
Closes the dialog.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-21
Figure 6-18 Assign or Create URIs for Extension
Table 6-16 URI Derivation fields
Field
Apply
(tel URI or SIP URI)
Regular Expression ($0)
Translation Pattern
Save
OK
Cancel
Description
Select which URI applies to this rule.
This determines the first half of the rule, to extract or modify the
extension.
Gives an example of the URI generated after applying the rule. $0
has to be included if the telURL and SIPURI have both $0 and @.
Saves the rule to the list.
Save the rule and close the dialog.
Close the dialog without saving.
This form is used to create both telURIs and SIPURIs. The data grid
shows all rules, and distinction is made using the column type; either
telURI or SIP URI.
The rules entered through OW5000 Admin are also shown but cannot be
deleted or modified. The delete buttons are disabled when the selection
is on Admin rule.
The rule entered through Admin can only be applied for a Profile in
DBTool.
The Translation Pattern value demonstrates the type of values that will
be generated when the Rule is used. Only one rule may be applied to a
telURI or SIP URI at a time.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-22
Database Operations
Locations
Selecting Locations displays Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19 Locations dialog box
Table 6-17 Location fields
Field
Description
PBX
PBX for the location.
Hierarchy Selector
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list.
Hierarchies
When OW5000 is installed, a pre-determined set of hierarchies are
installed for Location and Unit (organization) data. Hierarchies are
discovered by querying the OW5000 database. After the user selects
Organization or Location as the IEType, the database will be queried to
find available values for either the Unit or Location hierarchies. The user
needs to map the fields from the file to these types. While importing,
the hierarchy structure is enforced on the data. The record not obeying
the hierarchy is rejected.
An example of a virtual hierarchy type for locations is shown below
(Table 6-18).
Table 6-18 Hierarchy Type For Locations
Building
BL1
Room
A1
Bed
Telephone
BD1
1001
BL1
BL1
Patient1
2000
A2
BL1
BL1
Notes
BD2
A2
DB3
2001
Break Room
2002
Patient 2
Patient 3
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-23
In the example above (Table 6-18), the 2nd to last record will be rejected during
Import, as it is invalid.
NOTE
Organization
When OW5000 is installed, a pre-determined set of hierarchies are
installed for organization data. Organization has the same hierarchy
mechanism as locations.
Please open the Settings page and click OK at least once; otherwise the Company,
Division, and Department will not be imported.
NOTE
Figure 6-20 Organization dialog box
Table 6-19 Location fields
Field
PBX
Hierarchy Selector
Location Types
Description
PBX for the organization.
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list.
Select the location type for this organization.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-24
Database Operations
Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings
The Organization/Location Hierarchy import type provides the import
capability of organization and location simultaneously with hierarchy.
Figure 6-21 Organization/Location Hierarchy Settings
Table 6-20 Organization/Location Hierarchy fields
Field
Description
PBX
PBX for this hierarchy.
Hierarchy Selector
Unit Types
Choose one of the hierarchies from the list.
Select the unit type for this hierarchy.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-25
Person
Figure 6-22 Person Settings dialog box
Table 6-21 Person Settings fields
Group Name
Field
Person Access
Server
Description
Set the default Person Access Server in the following
cases:
• Person Access Server is mapped but the imported
value is incorrect.
• Person Access Server is not mapped.
IM Access Server Set the default IM Access Server in the following cases:
• IM Access Server is mapped but the imported value is
incorrect.
• IM Access Server is not mapped.
General Options
Note: IM Access Server is not set when the user does
not have an IM URI.
Sync or Update
Database
Select the desired method of synchronization.
• Update: Only adding/modifying the data which is in the
Profile source.
• Sync Method 1: Every Person that was deleted from
the Profile source is deleted from the database.
• Sync Method 2: Every Person not in the Profile source
is deleted from the database.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-26
Database Operations
Group Name
Field
Description
The case conversion options allow the user to decide if
the records in the database will be in mixed case, only
upper case, only lower case, or left as they are when
imported.
• Mixed: Imports names with the leading character in
uppercase (capitalized).
Case Conversion
• Upper: Converts the mapped fields to all upper case
characters.
• Lower: Converts the mapped fields to all lower case
characters.
• Leave As Is.
Note: This feature is applied to First Name, Last Name
and Middle Name.
This option defines how to create the Display Name from
the Display Name Generation dialog box, using the dropdown menu.
• Update Display Names in all records
This selection looks at a flag in the database to
determine if the existing Display Name has been
modified. If so, then it is not updated during the import.
Display Name
Generation
• Update non-modified Display Names only
This results in the regeneration of Display Name based
on the import data regardless of the modified flag.
• Do not update the Display Names
When this option is selected, the Display Name is not
built from Full Name for any matching employee.
Note: Updates non-modified Display Name only and
does not update the Display Names. Works only
when DBTool can determine the target Person.
Assigning an Organization or Location to a Person
The roles associated with a Person can have an organization and/or
location assigned to them (Employee, Physician, and so forth). To make
an assignment using DBTool, the following two things must be
considered:
• The location or organization must already exist in the database. A
Person import will only make an assignment between the role and
organization/location.
• A Fully Qualified Name of the Organization and Location must be
specified in the Import File. This is required for DBTool to determine
accurately which organization or location the role will be assigned.

For example, if a Person belongs to an organization department
Admin and is under the division Retail, which is under the company
AAA Corporation, the field should be specified in the input file as
follows:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-27

AAA Corporation~Retail~Admin.
The delimiter to specify the hierarchy here is ~ (tilde). This is treated as one value or
a single column.
NOTE
If the fully Qualified name is incorrect or DBTool is unable to find an organization
following the exact hierarchy in the database, an assignment is not made.
NOTE
Update and Synchronization
The OW5000 database may be synchronized with customer data
sources. This means that users can choose to have records that were
previously available in a data source to automatically be deleted by
DBTool.
Data synchronization occurs as a part of importing data. The most
significant differences when comparing Update mode to Synchronization
mode is that a unique identifier (Unique Id) is required for
Synchronization mode and data may be deleted in Synchronization
mode. In Update mode, mapping the unique identifier is optional.
Synchronization mode is only available for Person import type.
NOTE
The following example shows how to specify the UniqueId from the
Person Import Type.
Figure 6-23 Select UniqueId
Unique ID Type
OW5000 Defined
User Defined
Description
Select this definition when the user will use the DBTool exported
data as the import file.
Select this definition when the user will use their own import data as
the import file and use one of the parameters as UniqueId, such as
employee ID, login ID.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-28
Database Operations
Figure 6-24 Update Mode
Figure 6-25 Sync Method 1
Figure 6-26 Sync Method2
DBTool determines whether or not the person exists in the OW5000
database using the following logic.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Figure 6-27 OW5000 Database Check
Only the Work Email Address is checked. Home Email Address and Other Email
Addresses are not checked.
NOTE
Figure 6-28 Person Contact Method Settings dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-29
6-30
Database Operations
Table 6-22 Person Contact Method Settings fields
Person Contact Method Setting
PBX
If a PBX is not specified when a Contact Method and
person are imported, a default value selected here is
used.
• PBX
• Wireless PBX (Not used in this version)
This setting is applied only when importing extension
contact methods for a Person like Primary or Secondary
Extensions, and when a DTerm password is mapped.
Also this is applied only in the following cases:
Extension
Contact
• PBX is mapped but imported PBX value is incorrect.
Method
Settings
• PBX is not mapped.
Password already It is used by the user to indicate whether or not the
source password for the Extension is encrypted.
encrypted?
If the setting is selected as "NO", the source password is
not encrypted so DBTool will encrypt the password using
encryption OW5000 algorithm (not SHA-1) before
storing it.
If the setting is selected as "YES", the password is
assumed to have been previously encrypted with
OW5000 algorithm so it is not modified.
Figure 6-29 Person URI List dialog box
Table 6-23 Person URI Derivation Icons/Buttons
Field
Description
Edit the rule which is already created.
Delete the rule which is already created.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-31
Field
Description
Add New
When you click the Add New button to create a new rule, the field
is cleared in order to create a new rule. The value cleared is
not saved.
OK
Close the dialog.
Figure 6-30 Person URI Derivation
Figure 6-31 Person URI Derivation fields
Field
Description
Apply IM URI
Select applying rule from the created rule.
Apply SIPURI
Select applying rule from the created rule.
Provides a list of available Key parameters.
• First character of First Name + Last Name
• First Name
URI Key Parameter
• Last Name
• LoginId
• Prefix + Primary Extension
• Primary Extension
Note: Primary Extension and Prefix + Primary Extension keys are
only available and displayed in the US Market.
Translation
Gives an example of URI generated after applying rule. $0 and @
must be included in this field.
Save
Saves the rule and adds to data grid.
OK
Save the rule and close the dialog.
Cancel
Close the dialog without saving.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-32
Database Operations
NOTE
If Login ID is selected as the URI Key Parameter in Person URI Derivation, User
roles must be selected for creation in Import Settings so that the Login ID database
field can be mapped to a Login ID column in the Input File. This column MUST
contain unique Login IDs for each person being added or updated. If an input record
specifies a Login ID that is already in use in the OW5000 database, data associated
with the existing Person can be overwritten by the data that's being imported for that
Login ID. Please ensure that if you are attempting to add a new Person to the
database, that the specified Login ID is unique relative to existing Login IDs in the
database and relative to other Login IDs in the DBTool Input File.
Importing Data
After mapping all of the fields, data can now be imported.
Step 1
Click Import Data (Figure 6-12) to start an import operation. Depending
on the selected Import Type and the number of fields mapped, the import
operation may take several minutes for the import operation.
Step 2
Click the Stop button to cancel the import when changing a mapping or
when canceling an import. The main screen of the import displays. When
an import is stopped, data processed up to that point will remain in the
database.
Step 3
When the import is finished, Done is displayed in the Import Progress
dialog. From the bottom of the dialog, the user can know how much data
has been correctly stored in the database.
Step 4
Click Done to return to the import main screen. If an error occurred,
check the import log via OW5000 LogViewer and recheck the import file
format.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-33
Export Data
Figure 6-32 shows the data export flow using DBTool. In OW5000 R5,
DBTool supports 10 export types, which are the same as import.
Figure 6-32 Data Export using DBTool
If UC700/MC550 is not installed and it is a Japanese market, States/Provinces, User
Privileges and Person Addresses are not displayed.
NOTE
Open Profile
Once the user creates a profile, anyone with DBTool privileges can select
the profile by selecting Open from Export > Profile > Open.
Figure 6-33 displays.
Step 1
To create or open a profile for export, click Export on the menu bar
(Figure 6-33).
Figure 6-33 Open Export Profile dialog box
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-34
Database Operations
Table 6-24 Profile fields
Field
Description
Profile Name
List of profiles already created for export.
Figure 6-34 DBTool Export Screen
Table 6-25 Exported Data fields
Icon
Description
Moves the DataBase Field selected to Exported Fields list box,
indicating this field would be exported.
Moves the Exported field selected to DataBase Fields list box,
indicating this Field would not be exported.
Moves the selected field in Exported Fields up in the list box.
Indicates the order in which columns would be exported.
Moves the selected field in Exported Fields down in the list box.
Indicates the order in which columns would be exported.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Icon
6-35
Description
Removes a field from Exported Fields list box and adds it back to the
DataBase Fields list box indicating the field would not be exported.
Starts the Exporting.
Table 6-26 Export Settings fields
Icon
Write File Header
Output File
Hierarchy Selector
Location Types
Unit Types
Description
Determines whether or not a header (column names) should be
added to the beginning of the file.
Output file path and name.
Choose one of the predefined hierarchies from the list.
This parameter displays only when Location, Organization or
Organization/Location Hierarchy is selected as the Export Type.
Select the correct hierarchy based on the configuration.
Select the location type for this organization.
This parameter is displayed only when Organization is selected as
the Export Type. Select the correct location type based on the
configuration.
Select the unit type for this organization/location hierarchy.
This parameter is displayed only when Organization/Location
Hierarchy is selected as the Export Type. Select the correct unit type
based on the configuration.
Figure 6-35 Export Complete dialog box
When the export is finished, Export Completed is displayed in the
Export Progress dialog. The amount of data correctly written in the file is
displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-36
Database Operations
Step 2
Click Done to return to the export main screen. If an error occurs, check
the export log via OW5000 LogViewer.
When you select an existing file name, the file is overwritten by the Exported file.
NOTE
Admin
The Delete Options screen (Figure 6-36) shows the Admin flow using
DBTool. In OW5000 R5, two delete functions are supported.
Figure 6-36 Delete Options
Bulk Delete
To delete records using bulk delete, a Delete Options dialog box displays
(Figure 6-37). The objects are segregated by category.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-37
Figure 6-37 Delete Options dialog box
Parameters displayed in Figure 6-37 are different depending on the market and
conditions.
NOTE
Step 1
Select the desired objects and then click Delete. A Delete Confirmation
dialog box displays (Figure 6-38).
Figure 6-38 Delete Confirmation dialog box
Step 2
Click Yes to delete or No to cancel the deletion. The process begins. The
process is interruptible, but any deletes that have occurred to that point
will be committed.
Step 3
Click Done to finish the process.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-38
Database Operations
Delete Profile
Selecting Delete Profile displays Figure 6-39.
Figure 6-39 DbTool Profiles Deletion dialog box
Step 1
Click the desired profile to delete and then click Delete. Figure 6-40
displays.
Figure 6-40 Delete Profile Confirmation dialog box
Step 2
Click Yes. A Confirmation dialog box displays (Figure 6-41).
Figure 6-41 Confirmation Display dialog box
Step 3
Click Ok to finish.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
6-39
Help
Selecting Help from the DBTools Options dialog box (Figure 6-2)
displays basic version information in an About dialog box (Figure 6-42).
Figure 6-42 About dialog box
Table 6-27 Help fields
Field
Description
DBTool
OW5000 DBTool software build version
Database
OW5000 database version
.NET Framework
.NET Framework version used by DBTool
Database Server
The SQL Server instance name.
OW5000 Server
The name of the OW5000 server.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-40
Database Operations
Data Mapping Quick Reference Tables
Database Field Reference
Database fields are described for each type.
Table 6-28 Calendar Link
Type
SubType
Database Field
Email Server
Extension
First Name
Calendar Link
Last Name
LoginId
Office Code
Work Email Address
Table 6-29 Extension Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
CollaborationExtension
Country
DID Number
Emergency Number XML (Note)
Emergency Number XML Version (Note)
Extension
Extension
Is Monitored
Office Code(PBX Id)
Phone Type
SIP Access Server
SIP URI
Subline
Tel URI
Tenant
The Emergency Number XML and Emergency Number XML Version are for US
market only.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Table 6-30 License Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
API
CSTA
Extension
License
GCP
Office Code (PBX Id)
PRESENCE
SOAP
Table 6-31 Locations Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Office Code(PBX Id)
Number
Notes
Locations
Hierarchies
Area
Hotel Building I Hotel Room
Campus
Hospital I Nurse Station I Room I Bed
Office
Unknown Location
Table 6-32 Organization Type Database Import Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Office Code(PBX Id)
Number
Is External
Notes
Organization
Hierarchies
Company I Division I Department
Hotel
Locations Types
Area
Campus
Hospital
Hotel Building
Office
Unknown
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-41
6-42
Database Operations
Table 6-33 Organization/Location Hierarchy
Type
SubType
Organization/Location
Hierarchy
Database Field
Office Code(PBX Id)
Number
Is External
Notes
Hierarchies
Hotel
Company
Area
Area Extension
Area Note
Area Office Code
Campus
Campus Extension
Campus Note
Campus Office Code
Office
Office Extension
Office Note
Office Code
Hospital
Nurse Station
Room
Bed
Hospital Extension
Hospital Note
Hospital Office Code
Nurse Station Extension
Room Extension
Nurse Station Note
Room Note
Nurse Station Office Code
Room Office Code
Bed Extension
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Database Field
Bed Note
Bed Office Code
Table 6-34 Person Type Database Fields
Type
Person
SubType
Base
Database Field
Add Photo
Authorization Code
Display Name
First Name
IM Access Server
IM URI
Last Name
Middle Name
Note
Prefix
SIP Access Server
SIP URI(Person)
SIPUA Group
Suffix
Unique Id
User Defined 1
User Defined 2
User Defined 3
User Defined 4
User Defined 5
User Defined 6
Employee
Employee Confidentiality Status
Employee ID
Employee Location
Employee Organization
Employee Position
Employee Type
Patient
Allow Visitors
Nurse Desk Location
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-43
6-44
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Database Field
Nurse Desk Unit
Patient Account
Patient Admit Date
Patient Birth Date
Patient Confidentiality Status
Patient Discharge Date
Patient Gender
Patient Location
Patient Number
Patient Unit
Physician Confidentiality Status
Physician End Date
Physician Location
Physician Organization
Physician PID
Physician Specialty
Physician Start Date
Student
Student Confidentiality Status
Student Number
Student Start Date
Student Suspend Date
Guest
Do Not Disturb
Guest Address Line1
Guest CheckIn Date
Guest Checkout Date
Guest City
Guest Company
Guest Confidentiality Status
Guest Confidentiality Status Code
Guest Country
Guest CS FileName
Guest Folio
Guest Group Name
Guest Group Number
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
6-45
Database Field
Guest Language
Guest Room
Guest State Name
Guest Status
Guest Status Code
Guest Suite Id
Guest Type
Guest Type Code
Guest Unit Name
Guest UserDefined1
Guest UserDefined2
Guest UserDefined3
Guest UserDefined4
Guest UserDefined5
Guest UserDefined6
Guest Zip
IsNRG
IsVIP
Room Extension
Room Office Code
User
Login ID
NTLM Login ID
Password
Password (Encryption Key)
Password (Hash Value)
UC700 Privilege (NOTE)
MC550 Privilege (NOTE)
User Confidentiality Status
Contact Methods
AMW
Assured Mobility WiFi
AMW
Confidentiality Status (Assured Mobility WiFi)
AMW
Dterm Password(Assured Mobility WiFi)
AMW
Office Code(Assured Mobility WiFi)
AMW
Priority(Assured Mobility WiFi)
AP
Alpha Pager
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-46
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods (cont’d) AP
Database Field
Confidentiality Status(Alpha Pager)
AP
Country(Alpha Pager)
AP
Priority(Alpha Pager)
AP
Is Two Way(Alpha Page)
AP
PIN(Alpha Pager)
AP
Provider(Alpha Page)
EF
Confidentiality Status(External Fax)
EF
Country(External Fax)
EF
External Fax
EF
Priority(External Fax)
EPN
Confidentiality Status(External Primary Number)
EPN
Country(External Primary Number)
EPN
External Primary Number
EPN
Priority(External Primary Number)
EXN
Confidentiality Status(External Secondary
Number)
EXN
Country(External Secondary Number)
EXN
External Secondary Number
EXN
Priority(External Secondary Number)
ETN
Confidentiality Status(External Tertiary Number)
ETN
Country(External Tertiary Number)
ETN
External Tertiary Number
ETN
Priority(External Tertiary Number)
FAX
Confidentiality Status(Fax)
FAX
Dterm Password(Fax)
FAX
Fax
FAX
Office Code(Fax)
FAX
Priority(Fax)
HEA
Confidentiality Status(Home Email Address)
HEA
Internet Address(Home Email Address)
HEA
Priority(Home Email Address)
HPN
Confidentiality Status(Home Phone Number)
HPN
Country(Home Phone Number)
HPN
Home Phone Number
HPN
Priority(Home Phone Number)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods (cont’d) MP
6-47
Database Field
Confidentiality Status(Mobile Phone)
MP
Country(Mobile Phone)
MP
Mobile Phone
MP
Priority(Mobile Phone)
OEA
Confidentiality Status(Other Email Address)
OEA
Internet Address(Other Email Address)
OEA
Priority(Other Email Address)
OEP
Confidentiality Status(Other Email Pager)
OEP
Internet Address(Other Email Pager)
OEP
Priority(Other Email Pager)
OWPN
Confidentiality Status (Other Work Phone
Number)
OWPN
Dterm Password (Other Work Phone Number)
OWPN
Office Code(Other Work Phone Number)
OWPN
Other Work Phone Number
OWPN
Priority(Other Work Phone Number)
PE
Confidentiality Status(Primary Extension)
PE
Dterm Password(Primary Extension)
PE
Office Code(Primary Extension)
PE
Primary Extension
PE
Priority(Primary Extension)
PHP
Confidentiality Status (Personal Homepage)
PHP
Internet Address (Personal Homepage)
PHP
Priority (Personal Homepage)
PP
Confidentiality Status (Phone Pager)
PP
Country (Phone Pager)
PP
Phone Pager
PP
Priority (Phone Pager)
SE
Confidentiality Status (Secondary Extension)
SE
Dterm Password (Secondary Extension)
SE
Office Code (Secondary Extension)
SE
Priority(Secondary Extension)
SE
Secondary Extension
TE
Confidentiality Status (Tertiary Extension)
TE
Dterm Password (Tertiary Extension)
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-48
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Contact Methods (cont’d) TE
Addresses
Database Field
Office Code (Tertiary Extension)
TE
Priority(Tertiary Extension)
TE
Tertiary Extension
TM
Confidentiality Status (Text Messaging)
TM
Internet Address (Text Messaging)
TM
Priority (Text Messaging)
WEA
Confidentiality Status (Work Email Address)
WEA
Internet Address (Work Email Address)
WEA
Priority (Work Email Address)
WEP
Confidentiality Status (Work Email Pager)
WEP
Internet Address (Work Email Pager)
WEP
Priority (Work Email Pager)
WL
Confidentiality Status (Wireless)
WL
Office Code (Wireless)
WL
Priority (Wireless)
WL
Wireless
Billing Address
Billing Street
Billing City
Billing State
Billing CountryOrRegion
Billing Postal Code
Home Addresses
Home Street
Home City
Home State
Home CountryOrRegion
Home Postal Code
Shipping Addresses
Shipping Street
Shipping City
Shipping State
Shipping CountryOrRegion
Shipping Postal Code
Work Addresses
Work Street
Work City
Work State
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Database Operations
Type
SubType
Addresses (cont’d)
Database Field
Work CountryOrRegion
Work Postal Code
Table 6-35 Description of Contact Method Name
Description
AMW
Assured Mobility WiFi
AP
Alpha Pager
EF
External Fax
EPN
External Primary Number
EXN
External Secondary Number
ETN
External Tertiary Number
FAX
FAX
HEA
Home Email Address
HPN
Home Phone Number
MP
Mobile Phone
OEA
Other Email Address
OEP
Other Email Pager
OWPN
Other Work Phone Number
PE
Primary Extension
PHP
Personal Homepage
PP
Phone Pager
SE
Secondary Extension
TE
Tertiary Extension
TM
Text
WEA
Work Email Address
WEP
Work Email Pager
WL
Wireless
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
6-49
6-50
Database Operations
Table 6-36 Route/Trunk Type Database Fields
Type
SubType
Database Field
Beginning Trunk
Emergency Notification Route (NOTE)
Ending Trunk
Office Code(PBX Id)
Route Name
Route/Trunk
Route Number
Tenant
User Defined 1
User Defined 2
User Defined 3
User Defined 4
Emergency Number Route is for US market only.
NOTE
Table 6-37 SIPUA Group Type Database Fields
Type
Sub Type
SIPUA Group
Database Field
Group Name
Table 6-38 States/Provinces
Type
SubType
States/Provinces
Database Field
Country Name/Description
Name
State/Province Code
Fields in bold are mandatory parameters.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-1
7
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 consists of a base platform (OW5000 platform) and a suite of
applications that utilize this platform. The base platform consists of the
OW5000 database, the OW5000 web administrator tool, and various
system services and web services. The applications include UA5200, OnCall, Message Center, Procedure Manager, Room Direct, Calendar Link,
and UC700.
The OW5000 platform requires an administrator to enter the PBX,
extension and user information into the OW5000 Administrator web
application to populate the OW5000 database. The MA4000 already has
information that the OW5000 needs. When OW5000 is integrated into
UC Suite as a participating application (PA), this information can be
obtained from MA4000. OW5000 can be notified of changes in order to
keep the data current. The following topics are included in the chapter.
Chapter Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
Integration Configuration
Synchronization Entities
Organization
VoiceMail Server
User
The OW5000 database synchronization (DBSync) service for MA4000
Integration is installed with the OW5000 platform. The following entities
and sub-entities in MA4000 will be synchronized into OW5000, as shown
in Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.
Table 7-1 MA4000 to OW5000 Integration
MA4000 Entity
PBX
Extension
User
Organization
Voicemail Server
OW5000 Entity
PBX
TelephoneNumber (Extension)
Person
Unit (Organization)
VoiceMail Server
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-2
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Table 7-2 MA4000 to OW5000 Integration—Sub-Entity
MA4000 Sub-Entity
OW5000 Sub-Entity
Line appearance on an Extension Sub-line on an Extension
VoiceMailbox of a User
VoiceMail subscriber ID of a Person
Only one OW5000 server can be integrated to any given MA4000.
NOTE
The availability of an MA4000 and OW5000 server is critical. If an
OW5000 Server is not running, change notifications from the MA4000
may be missed and a full-sync must be performed again to sync the
OW5000 with the MA4000.
Integration Configuration
To configure the MA4000, select MA4000 Integration as shown in Figure 7-1.
NOTE
Before setting up MA4000 Integration, OW5000 Administrator should make sure all
OW5000 admin logins are also in the NEC CAS (Centralized Authentication
Service). Please ensure that the passwords are the same for a login in both OW5000
and CAS.
Figure 7-1 OW5000 Options—MA4000 Integration
An MA4000 Integration Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 7-2).
If this is the first time you are logging into the OW5000 Administrator, use the default
login ID admin and the default password admin.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-3
Figure 7-2 MA4000 Integration Configuration dialog box
The information below describes the MA4000 Integration Configuration
dialog box (Figure 7-2).
Current State
This will have a value of either Enabled or Disabled depending on the
state of the integration.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-4
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Synchronization Status
Synchronization Status displays the current status of the data
synchronization between MA4000 and OW5000. The status can have the
following three values:
Disabled - the integration is disabled.
In-Progress - the full synchronization is in progress.
Current - the full synchronization is complete and the OW5000
database is current. In this mode, the synchronization is listening to
change notifications from MA4000 and will update the corresponding
data. For example, the change notifications can include User update and
Extension update in OW5000, as they are received.
Enable MA4000 Integration
To enable MA4000 integration with the OW5000, click the Enable
MA4000 Integration check box.
OW5000 Connection
This is the OW5000 URL of the format http://%SERVER_NAME%/
OW5000. This URL is registered with MA4000 and used by MA4000 for
deep links.
Deep Links in MA4000
A Deep Link is a link in the MA4000 application for a PBX, Extension, or
a User. When selected, the user is taken to the corresponding OW5000
page. In MA4000, the deep link appears as Edit in OW5000.
Figure 7-3 Deep Link in MA4000
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-5
MA4000 Connection
Fields in the MA4000 section are described below:
MA4000 Base URL - This is the URL to the MA4000 application. For
example, http://<servername>/MA4000).
Login - A login with Administrator privileges is required.
Password - The password for the above login.
The default value for both the login name and the password is admin.
NOTE
MA4000 SQL Server Connection
The OW5000 needs the MA4000 SQL Server details and a read-only SQL
Server Login. This login is used by the OW5000 database
synchronization service to read the MA4000 database.
The following information describes the MA4000 fields in Figure 7-2.
Server Name - The server name where the MA4000 SQL Server is
located.
Server Instance - The named instance of the SQL Server where the
MA4000 Database is installed. If this is the default instance, the value is
not required.
Login - A login for the SQL Server which has read-only user access to
the MA4000 database.
Password - The password for the SQL Server login.
Database Name - The MA4000 database name.
Database Synchronization
DB Sync Listen Port - This is the port where the OW5000 DBSync is
listening to the change notifications from MA4000. This is an http port
hosted by the DBSync service itself and is not IIS dependent.
If MA4000 and OW5000 are installed on different servers, the firewall will have to be
opened on this port for incoming connections in the OW5000 server.
NOTE
Synchronize Prime Lines in MA4000 as Extensions in OW5000 - Prime
line extensions can be imported into OW5000 in ascending or descending
order. In ascending order, the Primary Extension in OW5000 will have the
lowest number for the Person. In descending order, the Primary Extension
will have the highest number. For example, if extensions 2001 and 1001
are assigned to User A in MA4000 and the user is imported as Person A in
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-6
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000, the Primary Extension will be either 1001 if it is ascending order,
or 2001 if it is in the descending order.
The ordering of the extensions for each person can be changed in OW5000 using
the Person page.
NOTE
Synchronize Line Appearances in MA4000 as Sublines in OW5000 The line appearances in MA4000 can be ringing or non-ringing
appearances. Line appearances on an extension in MA4000 are imported
as sub-lines on the extension in OW5000. This allows the option of either
importing only ringing line appearances or all line appearances.
UCE Attendant (UNIVERGE UA5200) and UCE Desktop Client
(UNIVERGE UC700) sublines and subline sync options must be properly
configured in order to avoid their deletion on synchronization with
MA4000.
If the attendant/user sublines are configured to ring in the voice
platform, select the Only ringing Line Appearances option.
If the attendant/user sublines are non-ringing, check the option
Synchronize Line Appearances in MA4000 as Sublines in
OW5000, and select All Line Appearances.
NOTE
If it is not advisable to sync non-ringing sublines for the entire system. Uncheck the
Sync with MA4000 check box for the attendant/user extensions, to prevent the
subline from being removed on sync.
Testing the Configuration
The configuration must be tested before it can be saved. After entering
all the appropriate values, click the Test button. This Test runs four
separate tests for verification.
Verify the MA4000 URL - This is done by the system connecting to the
MA4000 web services to retrieve the NECCAS URL. If the MA4000 URL is
not specified or is invalid, this test will fail.
Verify the MA4000 login and password - This is done by connecting
to the MA4000 private web services. This test is executed only if the
MA4000 URL is verified successfully.
Verify the SQL server machine name, instance name, login, and
password - This is done by the system connecting to the SQL server
and querying the SQL server version. There is no connection to the
MA4000. If the SQL connection information is not specified, this test will
fail.
Verify the MA4000 database name - This is done by connecting to
the SQL server and querying a value from the MA4000 database. This
test is only executed if the SQL server information was verified
successfully.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-7
When the test is complete, the results are shown for each piece of
information. For example, the MA4000 URL may have passed but the
MA4000 login and password failed. In this case, the MA4000 URL will be
shown as valid and the MA4000 login and password will be shown as
invalid.
Clicking Save without performing a successful test displays an error and
the configuration will not be saved.
—A configuration failure displays as a red X icon.
—A correct configuration displays as a green check-mark icon.
OW5000 performs a registration with MA4000 when the test is
successful. The menu structure, deep links, database change
notification URLs, and other integration information is registered with
MA4000. If the registration is successful, the integration information will
be stored in the OW5000 database and the database synchronization
service will be notified of the change.
The synchronization time depends on the number of Users newly defined or modified
in MA4000 since the last synchronization.
NOTE
MA4000 Database Mapping
This link is enabled only after the basic configuration settings in the
MA4000 Integration are applied and saved. This link opens another page
and provides options to map MA4000 fields to the OW5000 fields.
Contact Method Email - The email address for the user in MA4000 is
mapped to this email address field in the OW5000 database for the
Person.
Contact Method Extension 1 - The first available extension for the
user in MA4000 is mapped to this field in the OW5000 database for the
Person.
Contact Method Extension 2 - The second or next available extension
for the user in MA4000 is mapped to this field in the OW5000 database
for the Person.
Contact Method Extension 3 - The third or next available extension
for the user in MA4000 is mapped to this field in the OW5000 database
for the Person.
NOTE
I
if the Contact Method Extension 1 is not mapped, the first extension will be mapped
to Contact Method Extension 2. The 1, 2, and 3 signifies the order of the extensions
being assigned first.
Unit Type Hierarchy - In MA4000, organizations are created as Org
Levels and there is no type associated with them. OW5000 Orgs or Units
are defined as a certain type—for example, Company or Division. The
hierarchy of the Org in OW5000 has to follow a rigid type defined in this
page.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-8
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
This allows you to select the unit type hierarchy when Org is imported to
OW5000. If this option is not set, the Org will not be imported from
MA4000. Refer to “Organization” on page 7-13.
UC700 Users
This section of Figure 7-2 allows you to enable the automatic creation of
UC700 users during the import of MA4000 users.
This option is not available unless UC700 is installed on the OW5000 Server.
NOTE
The SIP and IM Access Servers should be defined in “Access Server
Configuration” on page 2-48.
The SIP and IM URI parameters and translation patterns are defined in
“Person Management” on page 2-81.
Additional Mapping Fields
This section allows the various User Defined Fields or Custom Fields
(UDF) for a User in MA4000 to a predefined set of OW5000 fields of a
Person. The same MA4000 UDF fields can be mapped to more than one
OW5000 field.
For example, a custom field called DID can be imported to the External
Primary Number of an OW5000 person.
MA4000 supports LDAP integration. This allows certain employeerelated data to be imported into MA4000 as custom fields, which can
then be imported into OW5000 fields using the above mapping. The
data can include Employee Title, Position, Type, Mobile phone number,
or home phone number.
The Override Blank/Null data option allows blank data in MA4000 to be
overwritten in the OW5000 database.
NOTE
The "…From MA4000" drop-down entries are populated from the User Defined Field
names in MA4000. If they are empty, refresh the page or navigate to it again.
Sometimes the entries may take a minute or two after the integration is enabled and
applied on the main integration page.
Synchronization
When a configuration is applied or saved in the MA4000 Integration
page or MA4000 Database Mapping page, a full synchronization is
initiated. A full re-sync will happen if it was already synchronized before.
The entities will be synchronized as per the rules and matching
algorithms.
If a full synchronization was completed, at least once before, and when
a full re-synchronization is initiated again, the following will apply:
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-9
1
The link between the MA4000 entity and OW5000 entity is lost until the full
sync is completed again. When the link is lost, any update to the MA4000
entity may or may not update the same OW5000 entity created by the
previous sync. It will follow the matching algorithms again. For Example:
During the first sync User A in MA4000 is created as Person A in OW5000.

During a full re-sync, if you change any field in User A that participates in the
matching algorithm like FirstName or LastName, and when the link is not yet
re-established, then the matching algorithm may not match the User A record
with Person A. Instead, it will match it to Person B, or create a new Person if a
match is not found.
2
All the matching algorithms for PBX, Extension, User, Org, and so forth are
executed again.
For additional fields mapping for custom fields (UDF), the values
imported by the old mapping rules will remain in OW5000.
Synchronization Entities
PBX
The PBX is the most basic entity in both the OW5000 and MA4000
application. All the other entities are either directly or indirectly
dependent on the PBX. The PBX holds specific attributes like IP address
and OfficeCode.
PBX Matching Algorithm
• MA4000 PBX is matched by the IP address with a PBX in the OW5000
database. Multiple MA4000 PBXs with the same IP address are
matched to the same (single) PBX in OW5000.
• If no matching PBX is found using the IP address, it is matched by
PBX name. The PBX Name is unique in OW5000. This OW5000 PBX
should not already be matched to a different MA4000 PBX.
• If no match is found, a new OW5000 PBX is created.
Table 7-3 Fields Mapping—PBX
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Comment
Name
Name
String / 50
Name
RMIBindName
String / 50
Formed as “OaiServer” +
PBXName
PBXType
N/A
Predefined types in OW5000
String / 15
Uses OaiHostIP first. If blank,
HostIP is used.
PBXType
HostIP or OaiHostIP IPAddress
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-10
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
PBXOfficeCode
CallForward
N/A
OfficeCode
String / 4
IsSplitCallForward
Bool
PBXClientServerPort
Int
Comment
OfficeCode is unique in
OW5000. The value is set only
if a new PBX is created in
OW5000.
Finds the max in OW5000 DB
and increments it by 1. If none
is found, assign 44000.
Other Import Rules and Algorithms
PBX Type Matching
Regardless of a PBX being created or updated in OW5000, the type of
the PBX is matched to the type in MA4000.
If MA4000 PBX Type = 71 (PBX 2000), Then
Match it to NEAX 2000 IPS in OW5000.
If MA4000 PBX Type = 51 (SV7000 MPS)
Begin
If IsMPS flag is set Then
Match it to SV7000 MPS in OW5000
Else
Begin
If LicensedPirCount = 0 And LicensedVpimCount =0 Then
Match it to NEAX 2400 IPS in OW5000
ElseIf LicensedPirCount is between 1 and 4
And LicensedVpimCount is between 1 and 16 Then
Match it to SV7000 in OW5000
End
End
If MA4000 PBX Type = 81 (SV8100)
Begin
Match it to SV8100 in OW5000.
End
The PBX type is not supported if it is not matched by the above algorithm. The PBX
will not be imported when the PBX type is not supported.
NOTE
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-11
OfficeCode Import
The Officecode value is set in OW5000 only when a PBX is being
created. If the PBX is being updated, it will retain the existing value.
Officecode is unique in OW5000 and is set to the PBXOfficeCode in
MA4000. If the value of Officecode is already set for another PBX in
OW5000, a new, unique Officecode is formed and set in OW5000.
A unique Officecode is created by taking the first 4 characters of the PBX
name. If that officecode already exists, a unique 4 digit number starting
from 1234 is assigned.
Extension
The Extension is dependent on a PBX. The same extension number can
exist on multiple PBXs. Before synchronizing an extension, the DBSync
will synchronize the PBX of the extension. Other attributes of the
extension are also imported—for example, phone equipment type and
line appearances (sub-lines).
Extension Matching Algorithm
• The MA4000 extension is matched to OW5000 by the number and the
PBX it belongs to.
• The Extension number is unique in a PBX.
• If the extension number for the PBX does not already exist in
OW5000, a new extension is created.
Table 7-4 Fields Mapping—Extensions
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Number/NetworkNumber
/ Physical Number / Number
Station Number
Tenant
StationNumber
Line Appearance
Phone Type
Tenant
String / 32
Comment
For PBX Type = 51
(SV7000 or NEAX 2400),
the NetworkNumber is
used. If not available,
PhysicalNumber(Station
Number) is used.
int
Number /
NetworkNumber /
PhysicalNumber/
StationNumber
Sub-line
String / 32
Phone Equipment Type N/A
Emergency Data Location NENA Emergency Data
XML
XML
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Predefined types in
OW5000
Not visible in OW5000
Admin; used by the EOSN application
(Emergency On-Site
Notification).
7-12
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Conference Extension Import
If an Extension in MA4000 is a conference extension, it is not imported
to OW5000.
Phone Equipment Type Matching:
If MA4000 Phone Type ID = 1 or 50 or 51 (Analog) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is Analog.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 38 (SP30) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension 
is SP30(SIP).
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 43 (SIP-BASIC) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is SIMPLE.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID = 14 (DTR-16D) Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is DTerm.
ElseIf MA4000 Phone Type ID is any other Then
OW5000 Phone Equipment type of the extension is DTerm.
Line Appearances (Sub-lines)
The line appearances in MA4000 can be ringing or non-ringing
appearances. Line appearances on an extension in MA4000 are imported
as sub-lines on the extension in OW5000.
Depending on the settings in the MA4000 integration page in OW5000
Admin, either only ringing or all line appearances are imported for an
extension. Refer to “Database Synchronization” on page 7-5 for more
information.
If the extension already exists in OW5000, the sub-lines are exactly
matched with the MA4000. Therefore, depending on the pre-existing
sublines on the extension, sub-lines may be added or removed from the
extension in OW5000.
For each extension on the Extension page in OW5000 Admin, there is an
option called Synchronize Subline from MA4000. If this setting is
turned OFF for an extension, the MA4000 line appearances are not
imported as sub-lines in OW5000 for that extension. Refer to “Extension
Management” on page 2-17 for more information.
NENA Emergency Location Data
MA4000 captures location information for an Extension for emergency
purposes. The location data is stored as XMLs in the NENA format.
Currently, only NENA versions 2.1 and 3 are supported.
The location XML is stored ‘as is’ in the OW5000 DB. Certain fields are
parsed out and stored separately as well. The fields ANI, Address
(formed by linking various fields like house number, street, city, state,
zip and so forth), Location Name, and Comments are parsed out from
the XML and stored separately.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-13
This data is not shown on the OW5000 Admin. It is only available to the
E-OSN application (Emergency On Site Notification). The E-OSN client
displays these details.
Organization
Organization in MA4000 is defined as the Organization-Level. It is a
hierarchical representation of the orgs. The user is assigned to an org in
MA4000 and the corresponding person in OW5000 is assigned after
importing.
In MA4000, organizations are created as Org Levels and there are no
types associated with them. In OW5000, Orgs or Units are defined as
certain types, such as Company, Division and so forth. The hierarchy of
the Org in OW5000 has to follow a rigid type defined in the Unit Type
Hierarchy page.
To import Orgs into OW5000, the Unit Type Hierarchy should be selected
in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin. Refer to “MA4000
Database Mapping” on page 7-7.
The number of levels of the Orgs that are imported from MA4000
depends on the number of levels selected that the type hierarchy
actually supports.
For example, assume MA4000 contains a 5 level org hierarchy as
follows:
NEC
NEC America
CTG
Enterprise Apps
Development
In OW5000, a unit type hierarchy of Company | Division | Department is
selected.
After the sync, OW5000 will only have 3 levels of the Org since the unit
type hierarchy supports only 3 levels. The root Org NEC will be created
as type Company, NEC America will be created as type Division and
CTG will be as type Department. The next two levels Enterprise Apps
and Development will not be imported. A 5 level unit type hierarchy
should be selected in order for them to be imported.
Organization Matching Algorithm
The root Org level is matched by the Org Name to a root level Unit(Org)
in OW5000.
All other orgs are matched to the name and parent org in that particular
level.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-14
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Table 7-5 Fields Mapping—Organization
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Name
Description
N/A
Parent
Comment
UnitName
String /100
Note
String / 1000
UnitType
N/A
Assigned based on the
Unit Type Hierarchy
selected.
Parent
N/A
Parents should be the
same.
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Unit Type Hierarchy ‐ If a Unit Type Hierarchy is not selected in the MA4000 Integration page, the Orgs are not imported.
Employee Role - In OW5000, the Orgs are assigned to the Person via
Employee Role.
VoiceMail Server
VoiceMails in UC can be stored in external NEC voicemail server systems
or 3rd party voicemail server systems. Every User is assigned a
VoiceMail box which is associated with a VoiceMail server.
VoiceMail Server Matching Algorithm
The criteria to match an MA4000 voicemail server to OW5000 is the
name of the voicemail server.
If a voicemail server does not exist, a new voicemail server is created in
OW5000. The name is unique in OW5000.
The type of voicemail server is also imported to OW5000. OW5000 only
supports the following VoiceMail server types. All other VoiceMail server
types are stored as "Other" when synchronized from MA4000:
—UNIVERGE UM8500 (Exchange-based)
—UNIVERGE UM8500 (SQL-based)
—NEAXMail AD-64
—NEAXMail AD-120
—UNIVERGE UM4730
—Other
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-15
Table 7-6 Fields Mapping—VoiceMail
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Name
VMS Type
Description
String / 50
VoiceMailServerType
N/A
Comment
Assigned based on the
voicemail server types.
User
Users in MA4000 are imported as Persons in OW5000. The extensions
assigned to a User in MA4000 are imported as Contact Methods in
OW5000, depending on the mapping defined in the Database Mapping
section in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin. Refer to
“MA4000 Database Mapping” on page 7-7 for more information.
The Custom Fields or UDF defined in MA4000 can also be imported to
OW5000 to one or many of predefined fields in OW5000.
User Matching Algorithm
A MA4000 User is matched to an OW5000 Person by the combination of
FirstName, LastName and the extension assigned in MA4000. If the
extension is not empty in MA4000, then find the person in OW5000 with
same FirstName, LastName and Extension and in unsynchronized state.
Any one extension of the MA4000 user can match to any extension of
the OW5000 person.
If not found, or if there is no extension for the MA4000 user, find a
person with the same FirstName, LastName and no extensions (no
primary, secondary or tertiary) and in unsynchronized state.
If no matching Person is found, or if the Person is already associated
with a different User of MA4000, then a new OW5000 Person is created.
If no matching User is found, or if the matched Person is already
associated with a different User of MA4000, a new OW5000 Person is
created.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-16
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Table 7-7 Fields Mapping—User
MA4000 Field
OW5000 Field
Data Type/Length
Comment
FirstName
FirstName
String / 30
MiddleInit
MiddleName
String / 30
LastName
LastName
String / 30
Email
ContactMethod Email
String / 100
It is mapped based on the
ContactMethod defined.
Extension
Primary/Secondary /
Tertiary extension
String / 16
Extensions are assigned
depending on the contact
method defined.
OrgLevel
Organization of the
Employee Role or any
other role
VoiceMail box subscriber
VoiceMailBoxNumber
id
String / 16
Custom or User Defined Various fields in OW5000 N/A
Fields
N/A
UserRole
Values are imported
based on the mapping of
Additional Fields in the
Admin.
UC700 User: UserRole
with UC700 security
authorizations; SIP and
IM URIs are also
assigned.
Extension Assignment Algorithm
Extensions in MA4000 are imported as Primary, Secondary or Tertiary
Extensions in OW5000. The order and mapping is determined by how
the Contact Method for Extensions is mapped in the MA4000 integration
page in OW5000 Admin. Refer to “MA4000 Database Mapping” on
page 7-7 for more information.
If an extension for an MA4000 user is a virtual extension and if it is a
sub-line of another prime-line extension for the same user, it will not be
assigned separately as an extension.
If certain extensions are assigned to an OW5000 person but are not part
of the MA4000 user, they are removed from the OW5000 person.
If an extension is already assigned to the OW5000 person before
synchronizing with MA4000 as one of the Primary, Secondary or Tertiary
extensions, their order of assignment will not be changed irrespective of
the MA4000 database mapping for the contact methods. For example,
Person A has extension 2555 as Primary and 3555 as Secondary
extension in OW5000 and the corresponding User A in MA4000 has
3555 as the first extension and 2555 as the second. In this case, the
extension assignment of Person A in OW5000 is preserved. The order of
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
7-17
extensions assigned follows the database mapping rules only for newly
imported persons and not for the existing persons in the OW5000.
Other Import Rules & Algorithm
Empty FirstName and LastName not Imported - If an MA4000 user
has both first and last names blank, the user is not synchronized to
OW5000.
Empty LastName - If an MA4000 user has only the last name blank,
the last name in OW5000 is formed as "x" + extension number.
NEW USER not Imported - If an MA4000 user has the first name as
NEW USER, the synchronized is not imported to OW5000.
Employee Role - If a Person is added to OW5000, by default the
Person in OW5000 is associated with an EmployeeRole.
If the Person exists in OW5000 and has a Role other than Employee Role
associated with it (like Physician Role, Student Role, Patient Role and so
forth), the Employee Role is not assigned to the Person.
MA4000 Publish To Directory Option - MA4000 has a global option
called Show a Publish checkbox for each User in the MA4000 Setup.
If this option is not checked, all users are published and are candidates
for synchronization with OW5000.

If the option is checked, each user in MA4000 has an option called
Publish To Directory. If this option is set as ON, the user is a
candidate to be synchronized to OW5000. If the option is set as OFF, the
user is not synchronized to OW5000.
UC700 Users
A UC700 user can be automatically created if the settings described in
“MA4000 Database Mapping” on page 7-7 are configured. A UC700 user
is created by adding a UserRole for a Person in OW5000 and assigning
the credentials.
Voice Mailbox
OW5000 supports only one Voice Mailbox per person and it should be
unique. It cannot be shared with another person.
In MA4000, if there are multiple users associated to the same mailbox
or multiple mailboxes for the same user, then OW5000 will generate
errors in the Error Log during synchronization. To correct, go to MA4000
and remove the extra User associations for the offending mailboxes.
Custom Fields or User Defined Fields (UDF)
Custom fields defined for a User are imported and assigned to the
OW5000 person, provided they are mapped using the Additional Fields
Mapping section in the MA4000 Integration page in OW5000 Admin.
Custom fields in MA4000 can be mapped to one or many of the following
OW5000 fields (Table 7-8).
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-18
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
Table 7-8 Fields Mapping—Custom Fields
OW5000 Fields
Comments
Employee ID
Employee Position
Employee Type
If this field does not exist in OW5000, it is dynamically created.
The Employee Types must be predefined in OW5000.
Title Prefix
Title Suffix
External Primary Number
External Secondary Number
External Tertiary Number
Fax
External Fax
Mobile Phone Number
Home Phone Number
Work Email Address
Home Email Address
Other Email Pager
UserDefined1
UserDefined2
UserDefined3
UserDefined4
UserDefined5
UserDefined6
NTLM Login ID
This is assigned to the UserRole only if the UC700 user auto
creation is enabled.
Work Address
Work City
Work State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Work Zip
Work Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Home Address
Home City
Home State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Home Zip
Home Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
OW5000 Fields
7-19
Comments
Billing Address
Billing City
Billing State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Billing Zip
Billing Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Shipping Address
Shipping City
Shipping State
State should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
Shipping Zip
Shipping Country
Country should be predefined using OW5000 Administrator.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
7-20
OW5000-MA4000 Integration
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix A - 1
Appendix A
Acronmys and Descriptions
3rd Party SIMPLE
Terminal
The terminal which communicates with Access Server via Standard SIP/
SIMPLE Interface.
Access Server
The SIP Terminals communicate with this server.
BLL
Business Logic Layer - A code repository where common functionality is
added to reduce duplication by increasing re-use.
DAL
Data Access Layer - A set of code-generated DLLes that provide simple
physical database access and manipulation.
ML-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with SV7000 via Extended SIP Multi
Line Interface. Means DtermSP30 (SIP).
OW5000 Administrator
Refers to an individual who has access privileges to system
configuration features in OW5000.
Presence Server
Total system of the presence server which consists of single or multiple
Access Servers and single DB Server (OW5000 Platform).
STD-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with SV7000 via Standard SIP
Interface.
UNIVERGE SIP
Terminal
Indicates both WL-SIP terminal, ML-SIP terminal, and STD-SIP terminal.
WL-SIP Terminal
The terminal which communicates with SV7000 via Extended SIP Single
Line Interface. Include MH250, FOMA N900iL and FOMA N902iL.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix A - 2
Acronmys and Descriptions
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix B - 1
Appendix B
Regular Expressions
The normalization rules are created using regular expressions. Table
Appendix B-1 lists representative regular expressions.
Table Appendix B-1 Regular Expressions
Regular Expression
Meaning
^
The line head is matched.
$
The line end is matched.
()
Means to group, record, and call the content in the parentheses
later.
[]
One character in the brackets is matched. A range can be specified
using a hyphen.
.
Any one character is matched.
|
One character string or another is matched.
*
The immediately preceding expression appears zero or more times.
+
The immediately preceding expression appears one or more times.
?
The immediately preceding expression appears zero or one time.
{m}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times.
{m,}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times or more.
{m,n}
The immediately preceding expression appears m times or more, n
times or less.
\d
Digits 0 to 9 are matched. Same as [0-9].
\s
A space character is matched.
When a special character used in regular expressions, ^, $, [, ], *,
+, ?, |, (, or ) is to be treated as a normal character, each one
needs to be preceded by \ as follows: \., \^, \$, \[, \], \*, \+, \?, \|, \(,
or \). When a special character is treated as a normal character
within [ ], \ need not be appended (except for \, ^, and ]). When - is
used as a normal character within [ ], it is represented as \-.
A character string grouped by () can be referenced by $n. $n means
that the nth group from the line head is to be referenced. $0 means
that the whole line is to be referenced.
Table Appendix B-2 and Table Appendix B-3 show examples of
normalization rules, which are only for reference and need not be
followed to create the normalization rules for your system.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix B - 2
Regular Expressions
Table Appendix B-2 Normalization Rules (Global Numbers)
Regular Expression
Conversion
Examples
09012345678
^0([0-9]{10})$
+81$1
^0([0-9]{9})$
+81$1
^0(\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3
-> +819012345678
0312345678
-> +81312345678
090-1234-5678
-> +819012345678
03-1234-5678
-> +81312345678
^\(*0(\d)[()\-](\d\d\d\d)[()\](\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3
(03)1234-5678
-> +81312345678
03(1234)5678
-> +81312345678
^\+(\d)-(\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d)-(\d\d\d\d)$ +$1$2$3$4
^0(\d)-(\d\d\d\d)(\d\d\d\d)\sX(\d\d\d\d)$
+81$1$2$3;ext=$4
+1-212-345-6789
-> +12123456789
03-1234-5678 X2000
-> +81312345678;ext=2000
Table Appendix B-3 Normalization Rules (Local Numbers)
Regular Expression
^([0-9*#]{4})$
^2([0-9*#]{4})$
Conversion
$1;phone-context=nec.com
2$1;phone-context=nec.com
Examples
2000
-> 2000;phone-context=nec.com
20000
-> 20000;phone-context=nec.com
81070000
^8([0-9*#]{7})$
$0;phone-context=nec.com
^8-(\d\d)-([0-9*#]{5})$
8$1$2;phone-context=nec.com
-> 81070000;phonecontext=nec.com
8-10-70000
^$
-> 81070000;phonecontext=nec.com
No caller number (anonymous)
notknown;phone-context=nec.com -> notknown;phonecontext=nec.com
^$indicates a blank line. When the caller number cannot be acquired at
termination, the regular expression for a blank line is matched. When
the conversion result is tel:notknown;phone-context=~, "unknown" is
displayed on the MOC.
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix C
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
C-1
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification
Group Access Control
PBX based Control
----
Conference Bridge
--
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
25
-
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Add New Bridge
Show Allow List
Select
Extensions
--
Range Delete
Enable Extensions
Licensed Information
Pager Providers
--
--
Add New Pager Provider
PBX Settings.
Add New PBX
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Show Deny List
Select
M
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bridge Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
25
-
Tenant
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
Monitored Number
Select
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
Ports
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
Is Host Controlled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Extension
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
PBX
-
-
X
-
Top of the list
Off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dterm
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
1
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
JP
X
X
X
X
DID Number
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
telURI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
128
-
X
X
X
X
SIPURI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NotAssigned
X
X
X
X
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
On
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Subline
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
1
X
-
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
"only one ""@"" must be required Case-sensitive"
0-9, #, *, 16 chars,
Max number of sublines is 32
X
X
X
Starting Extension
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
Ending Extension
Extension pattern regular expression(for telURI)
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Default value should be ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$ same as the validation rule o
Extension page Extension edit box
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Non-editable
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Enabled
-
0-9, #, *, 16chars
Max number of ports is 32
X
(Collaborated Extension)
Is Monitored
M
ASCII only
X
Collaboration
Select
"ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
X
Tenant
Tenant
Remark
X
Country
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
X
Default value should be ^([0-9,#,*]{1-16})$ same as the validation rule o
Extension page Extension edit box
Non-editable
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Check All
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
SOAP
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
-
CSTA
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
GCP
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
-
X
-
-
PRESENCE
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
API
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
X
X
X
-
X
Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
Display license information (non-editable)
US Market Only
TAP Dialup(1-Way)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
TAP Dialup(2-Way)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
SNPP Host Name
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Port (Number)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
MAX Length
PBX Name
Input
M
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
Input
M
X
-
-
*
-
-
Office Code(PBX Id)
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
--
IP Address
PBXs
X
X
M
Translation pattern regular expression(for SIPURI)
Licenses
X
X
Select
Extension pattern regular expression(for SIPURI)
--
X
X
Select
URI Format
Enable PBXs
X
Show Deny List
Translation pattern regular expression(for telURI)
Platform
-
Off
Show Allow List
Phone Type
Add New Extension
M
Range
*#
Special Chars
Input
Deny as Default
Length
Number
Group Name
Default Value
Related
Application
Access Control
Add New Group
Is
Mandatory
Asia (Other)
SIPUA Group
Input
Method
Parameter
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
Alphabet
Available Char
--
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
-
X
X
X
X
a-z, A-Z, 0-9, - (dash), .(period)
-
X
X
X
X
4
-
X
X
X
X
40
Client/Server Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
PBX Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Special Dial Code
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
-
-
-
Split Call Forward
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
Locations
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Pbx Reconnect Delay
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Heartbeat Timeout
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Off
UGN (User Group Number)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
*
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Server IP Address
SIP Server IP Address (port)
-
-
5060
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
ASCII only
US Market Only
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
1-65535
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Available Char
AreaCode Rules
Add New AreaCode Rule
Add New Destineation PBX
PBX->PBX Dialing
Add New Source PBX
Platform
(cont'd)
Route/Trunks
Serial Ports
Voice Mail Servers
Reserved Numbers
Add New Monitored Number
Voice Mail Pilot Numbers
Add New Pilot Number
--
--
-
General Settings
Add New Trunk
Add New Serial Port
Add New Voice Mail Server
Routing Info
Applications Message Service
--
Server Settings
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
X
X
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
10
-
X
X
X
X
X
Range
*#
Special Chars
X
X
Length
Number
Alphabet
X
M
Default Value
City/Area Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
Long Dist Access Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
Local Access Code
Int. Direct Dial Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
National Code
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Locations
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Target City/Area Code
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
Top of the list
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
24
-
X
X
X
X
Include City/Area Code
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Destination PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Dialing Prefix
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
Extensions beginning with
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Source PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Top of the list
X
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
X
X
X
X
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Tenant
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-63
X
X
X
X
Reserved Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Monitored Number
X
X
X
X
-
Un-assigned
0-9, #, *, 16 chars
Application
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Pilot Number
Route Number
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
X
Z
Z
Z
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-899
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
30
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Beginning Trunk
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-255
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Ending Trunk
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
1-255
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Tenant Number
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
1
1-63
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Is Monitored
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Is EOSN
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
-
-
-
Displays only when EOSN is installed and user login has EOSN Admin role
UserDefined 1
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 2
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 3
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
UserDefined 4
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Serial Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Baud Rate
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
300
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
DataBits ID
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
7
X
-
-
UC700/MC550
US Market Only
-
Parity
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Even
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Stop Bits
Select
○
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HardWare
X
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
Flow Control
Select
M
Name
Input
M
Type
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
US Market Only
UC700/MC550
UC700/MC550
System ID
Imput
O
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Base URL
Imput
O
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Server Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
40
-
X
X
X
X
6060
X
X
X
X
62000
X
X
X
X
1025-65535
X
X
X
X
1025-65535
00
X
X
X
X
00-FF
*: From 'A' to 'F' are available
-
1800
X
X
X
X
180-72000
-
-
500
X
X
X
X
500-4000
-
-
Off
X
X
X
X
-
TCP/IP
X
X
-
*
-
-
Listen Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Legacy Port
--
--
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
RPC Listen Port
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
60002
TOS
Input
If AS, M
X
*
-
-
-
-
2
-
Keep Alive
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Timer T1
Input
If AS, M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Is PSGW
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Binding Type
Routing Rule
IP Address
Select
If PSGW, M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
Input
O
X
-
-
*
-
-
Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
Translation Pattern
Test Routing Rule
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
Test Routing Rule
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
--
TCP Service Poirt
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
ICA Name
Input
O
Legacy TCP/IP Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1025-65535
Add New Routing Rule
a-z, A-Z, 0-9, - (dash), .(period)
IP Address
.(period)の
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
1025-65535
-
Add New Redirect Configurations
X
Incoming Prefix
X
--
X
Number
M
Add New Access Server
X
"ASCII only
Case-sensitive"
X
Target Exchange
Top of the list
Remark
X
Direct Dial Code
Input
Incoming Call Assistant
Redirect Configurations
M
Input
Is
Mandatory
IP Address
Access Server
Applications
Input
Country Code
Input
Method
Parameter
Related
Application
Add New Location
--
PBXs
(cont)
Location Name
Button Name
Asia (Other)
Locations
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
X
X
X
X
1024-65535
X
X
X
X
100
X
X
X
X
100
X
X
X
1024-65535
5425
IP Address(Ranges are not checked)
*:Only '.' is available
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
5424
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Name Display Enabled in PBX
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
On
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Show External Number
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Show DID Information
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Password Required
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Chime on Incoming Call to Subline
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Off
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Outbound Call Log Size
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
9
-
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Inbound Call Log Size
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
9
-
100
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Max Idle Time (seconds)
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
15
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Name Display Format for Employee Match
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Employee Display Name
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Redirect Number
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Available Char
*#
Special Chars
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
Range
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Force Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Heartbeat
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X*
X*
X*
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Incremental Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
OAI Timeout
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 minutes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Max Retry Delay
Select
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-65535
5 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Data Mode
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
LED Number
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
LSI Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
40
Legacy TCP/IP Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Display Status
Check
-
-
-
-
Password Required
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Max Idle Time
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default Online
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Default Offline
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Offline
Default Idle
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Away from Desk
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Busy
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In a Meeting
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Message Setting
Default Out of Office
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Out of Office
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Dterm
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Available
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Default Mobility
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Available
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Add New Meesage
System Presence
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
SIP Presence
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
NONE
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Force Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Heartbeat
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
Incremental Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
OAI Timeout
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Max Retry Delay
Select
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Data Mode
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
LED Number
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
Data Mode
Select
O
-
-
-
-
LED Number
Select
O
-
-
-
Applications (Cont'd)
Database Refresh Time (min)
Input
O
X
-
VMMA Short Timer
Input
O
X
-
VMMA Long Timer
Input
O
X
-
--
SMFN Version
Input
O
X
Special Outbound Dial Prefix
Input
O
Default Outbound Caller ID
Input
O
MC550 Server
Send Caller ID for Outbound Dial
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Online
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
X*
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X*
X*
X*
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
30 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
10 minutes
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
1-65535
5 seconds
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
Top of the list
Z
-
Z
Z
-
-
-
On
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5
-
Z
-
Z
Z
UC700/MC550/UA5200
MC550
MC550
MC550
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-58
??
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
-
Z
Z
MC550
Telephony Status Change Failure Announcement
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-58
??
Z
RESERVED LINE SETTINGS
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
-
Z
Z
Connect to Call if answered after
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Connect to Call if answered before
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
16
-
^([0-9*#]{1,16})$
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
Z
MC550
Z
-
Z
Z
MC550
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
0-63
0
-
X
X*
X
O
-
X
X
M
ACD Split Modes
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
Select
-
X*
15
Input
ACD Break Modes
X*
Off
RESERVED LINE STATUS OVERRIDES
Test Rule
X*
On
OAI Tenant Number
Normalization Rule
X
-
--
Add New
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
Server Settings
--
X*
X*
0-999
Caller id to be Displayed for Click to Call
--
X*
X*
5421
--
PBX Settings
X*
X*
1025-65535
User Settings
General Settings
ACD Work Modes
-
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X
Input
Check
Select
O
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
X
-
X
Z
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
Force Port
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X
X
X
Heartbeat
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
X
X
X
X
Selected
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
On
X
X
X
X
Incremental Retry Delay
Directory
O
-
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Telephony Status Change Success Announcement
PBX
Remote Call Control
O
Remark
Calling Name Override from Database
SMS Voice Mail Notification
OaiServer
Check
Is
Mandatory
Length
Number
--
Location Status Information
PBX Settings
Alphabet
--
--
PBX Settings
PBX
Input
Method
Related
Application
Server Settings
Default Value
Parameter
Button Name
Asia (Other)
Incoming Call Assistant (Cont'd) PBX Settings
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30 seconds
X
X
X
X
Max Retry Delay
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 minutes
X
X
X
X
Enable Free Locatoin Facility
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Listen Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-65535
X
X
X
X
Country Code
Select
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
3
-
X
X
X
X
Phone pattern regular expression
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Translation pattern
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Comment
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
Test dialed number
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Translated number(for test translation number)
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Test ANI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
16
-
X
X
X
X
Destination PBX
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
0
MC550
Use tenant 1
RCC runs on 5060
Max 16 digit.
0-9,#,* are available
Not editable
Max 16 digit.
0-9,#,* are available.
Not editable
Translated number(for test ANI translation)
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
(click pencil)
Enter the description for break mode X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
(click pencil)
Category Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
T
T
T
T
Mode Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
Description
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
ACD Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
T
-
-
-
for UC Agent Only
ACD Pilot Number
Input
O
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
T
-
-
-
Enter the description for work mode X
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
32
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/UA5200
Is VIP Wake-up Processing work mode
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/UA5200
Add New Split Mode
(click pencil)
UC700/UA5200
for UC Agent Only
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Available Char
-
2byte KANA
1byte KANA
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
100
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
-
-
-
Add New DID
US Market Only
PBX
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
Company
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
Name
Select
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
Add New
Type
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
Add New
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
50
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
LOCATIONS
Add New
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PHONE NUMBERS
Add New
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes
30
-
Last Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
-
Middle Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
-
X
X
X
X
Display Name
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
16
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
X
X
X
X
Suffix
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIP URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X
X
X
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIPUA Group
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
IM URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Voice Mail Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Subscriber ID
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Special Dial Code
Input
O
Add Photo
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
Not Assigned
X
X
X
X
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Not selectable before Voice Mail Server setting
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Not editalebefore Voice Mail Server setting
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
O
Not Assigned
"only one ""@"" must be required Case-sensitive"
Not Assigned
UserDefined1
X
X*
X*
X*
Input
O
UserDefined2
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Input
O
UserDefined3
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined4
Input
O
UserDefined4
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined5
Input
O
UserDefined5
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined6
Input
O
UserDefined6
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Note
URI key parameter
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
1000
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Translation pattern regular expression
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
100
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
LoginID
User
People
Add Role
Employee
Primary Extension
Secondary Extension
Tertiary Extension
Add New Contact Method
Assured Mobility WiFi
Other Work Phone Number
Wireless
Input
M
X
X
X
Primary Extension
-
X
X
X
Following key can be selected
-Primary Extension
X
New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Confirm New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
NTLM Login ID
Check
O
X
Z
Z
Z
Login is disabled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Password never expires
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Db Tool - Import/Export OW5000 Data
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
OW5000 Administrator
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Confidential Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Off
only one "@" must be required
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined2
UserDefined3
URI Format
Contact Method
X
X
Add New
UserDefined1
Role
US Market Only
Add New
Prefix
Directory (Cont'd)
US Market Only
UC700/MC550/UA5200
PHONE NUMBERS
First Name
Person
Not Set
Remark
ADDRESS
Type
-
Default Value
50
Notes
Name
Organizations
Range
*#
Special Chars
Input
Category Description
Is
Mandatory
Length
Number
Alphabet
Add New
Input
Method
Parameter
Related
Application
Locations
-
Category Name
Button Name
Asia (Other)
DIDs
-
Australia,Europe
Categories
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
8chars or longer, includes 1 number, 1 capital, 1 small, 1 special
Same as above
UC700/MC550
X
EmployeeID
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
-
X
X
X
X
Employee Position
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Employee Type
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Organization
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Location
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Confidential Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X
X
X
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X
X
X
* Pilot Number
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Dterm Password
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Dterm Password
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
PBX Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
Extension
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Top of the list
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
MC550
Dual Mode Number
* Primary Extension only
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
External Fax
External Primary Number
External Secondary Number
External Tertiary Number
FAX
Add New Contact Method (Cont'd) Hone Phone Number
Mobile Phone
Phone Pager
Home Email Address
Instant Messageing
Other Email Address
Other Email Pager
Personal Homepage
Text Messaging
Voice Mail
Work Email Address
Work Email Pager
People (Con'td)
Addresses
Directory (Cont'd)
--
--
Add New Address
Select
M
PIN
Input
M
Is 2-wqay?
Select
Pager Provider
Select
Confidentiality Status
-
-
-
-
Length
-
-
Range
Priority
-
1byte KANA
M
2byte KANA
M
Input
*#
Select
Special Chars
Country
Number
Number
Is
Mandatory
Default Value
-
Depend of the E164 counetry
ManageCustomerField
Positions
-
Add New Position
Specialities
-
Add New Specialty
User Privileges
-
-
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
No
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Country
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Depend of the E164 country
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Number
Input
M
X
-
X
-
-
-
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Internet Address
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Priority
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Confidentiality Status
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
None
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Default Country Code
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
City
Imput
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
State/Province
Select
Imput
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
UC700/MC550
Zip/Postal Code
Imput
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
9
X
Z
Z
Z
From
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
128
-
X
X
X
X
To
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
128
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined 1
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UserDefined 1(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 2
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 2(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 3
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 3(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 4
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 4(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 5
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 5(Required)
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
UserDefined 6
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
25
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
"ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
"ASCII only
Case-insensitive"
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Full Name Format
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Input
M
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Abbreviation
Check
--
--
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Title
Input
O
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
Description
Imput
M
X
X*
X*
X*
UC700/MC550/UA5200
User
Check
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
Employee
Check
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
US Market Only
LoginID
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
X
X
X
New Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
8chars or longer, includes 1 number, 1 capital, 1 small, 1 special
Confirm New Password
X
X
X
X
Same as above
Input
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
Login is Disabled
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Password never expires
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Employee Name
Input
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
DbTool - Import/Export OW5000 Data
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
OW5000 Administrator
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Value
Input
M
NTLM Login ID
Application Data
X*
X*
-
Select
UserDefined 6(Required)
--
X*
X
Range Delete
Full Name Format
Users
X
-
Address Type
Street
Remark
-
Country/Region
1
Related
Application
Alpha Pager
Contact Method (Cont'd)
Input
Method
Parameter
Asia (Other)
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
2000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Add New Country/Region
Countries & States
Add New State/Province
Range
Length
1byte KANA
2byte KANA
*#
-
Select the default country code
Select
M
-
-
-
-
JP
Input
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
http://(server)/ReportServer
X
X
X
X
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Blank(default)
X
X
X
X
Password never expires
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Default Password Validity Period
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Input
M
X
-
-
*
-
-
X
-
X
-
Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
1025-65535
X
IP Address / Name
X
-
X
-
SMTP Server Name
Input
O
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
Server SMTP Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-65535
SMTP Secure Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-65535
X
-
Username
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
Password
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
Sender Email
Input
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
X
-
-
-
Description
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
80
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Country Code
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Is Default For Install
Check
Is Default For CountryCode
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Code
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
50
X
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Profiles
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Enabled
Check
M
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Recurring Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Start Date
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Sunday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Every X Day(s)
X
Weekly
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0:00-23:59
Daily
2
1-366
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
-
-
-
US Market Only
-
-
US Market Only
-
-
US Market Only
Z
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
X
X
X
X
B
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-12
(blank)
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
C
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
first
X
X
X
X
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Sunday
X
X
X
X
E
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
(blank)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1-12
US Market Only
UC700/MC550
Profile which has been created by DBtool are listed. The profile which has
schedule information is NOT listed up. It is selectable when click Schedule
Profile, but not for clicking pencil case
X
O
2
US Market Only
X
Check
X
Available only when #13 is selected
No end Date
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Default
End By X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Edit with cale O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
Duration of Recurrence
X
Start Date
Edit with cale M
-
-
-
-
X
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Retention Days
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
File Name
Input
M
X
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
Enabled
Check
M
-
-
-
Recurring Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start Date
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Daily
Every X Day(s)
X
-
-
-
-
-
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Weekly
Database BackUp
X
Check
The C D of every E month(s)
Schedule Profile
(or click pencil)
X
X
X
Recurring
X
Thursday
Day A of every B month(s)
-
-
25
X
Friday
Monthly
Settings
-
Remark
Select the default home page
Daily
DBTool
-
Default Value
Reporting Services URL
O
-
Special Chars
Is
Mandatory
Number
Input
Method
Related
Application
---
Parameter
Asia (Other)
General Settings
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
14
0:00-23:59
Daily
2
1-12
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Recurring
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Sunday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Thursday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Friday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
X
X
X
X
B
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-12
(blank)
X
X
X
X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monthly
Day A of every B month(s)
The C D of every E month(s)
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
C
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-12
first
X
X
X
X
Sunday
X
X
X
X
(blank)
X
X
X
X
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
-
-
-
Range
1byte KANA
-
Length
2byte KANA
-
*#
-
Special Chars
Number
Is
Mandatory
Default Value
Duration of Recurrence
Settings (Cont'd)
Database Backup (Cont'd)
Schedule Profile (or click Pencil ico
History
--
No end Date
Select
O
End By X
Select
X
Start Date
Start Time
Templates
Template Management
Add New Template
-
-
MA4000 Integration -
-
Version Information --
--
-
--
Related
Application
Input
Method
Parameter
Asia (Other)
Button Name
Australia,Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
Sales Regions
North America
Group
Alphabet
Available Char
X
X
X
X
Available only when #13 is selected
X
X
X
X
Default
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Edit with cale O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
M
--
Remark
Template Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Template Name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
SIPUA Group
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Prefix
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Suffix
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Voice Mail Server
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Subscriber ID
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Special Dial Code
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Add Photo
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Note
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined1
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined2
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined3
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined4
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined5
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
UserDefined6
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Employee
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Guest
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Patient
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Physician
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Student
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
User
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Primary Exchange Email
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
ExchangeServer
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
ACD LogIn
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
ACD Server Name
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X*
X*
X*
CONTACT METHODS
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Billing
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Home
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Shipping
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Work
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Enable MA4000 Intagration
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
OW5000 Base URL
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
MA4000 Base URL
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Login
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Passeord
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Server Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
ServerInstance
Input
O
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Login
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Passeord
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Database Name
Input
M
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
DB Sync Listen Port
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Synchronize Prime Lines in MA4000 as Extensions in OW5000
Synchronize Line Appearances in MA4000 as Sublines in
OW5000
Contact Method Email
Select
Check
Select
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In Ascending Order
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Only ringing Line Appearances
X
-
-
-
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Contact Method Extension 1
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Contact Method Extension 2
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
100
X
US Market Only
Contact Method Extension 3
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Unit Type Hierarchy to import MA4000 Units
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
Auto Create UC700 Users
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
SIP Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
IM Access Server
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
-
-
-
US Market Only
X
X
X
X
--
--
Appendix C OW5000 Configuration Specification (Cont'd)
Available Char
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
O
-
-
-
-
Length
Sender IM Uri
Select
X
X
X
Receiver IM Uri
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
IM Text
Input
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
IM Log Age
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
X
X
X
X
Maximum File Size
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
3
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
Blank(default)
M
X
X
X
X
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 - 500
IM Archiving Password
Input
Enabled
Check
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Start Date
Edit with cale M
X
-
-
-
-
-
Start Time
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Recurrence Pattern Occurs
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Every X Day(s)
X
Configure
Recurring
0:00-23:59
Daily
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Weekly
IM Archiving Management
-
2
1-12
Recur every X weeks on:
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Sunday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Monday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Tuesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Wednesday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Thursday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Friday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Saturday
Check
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Monthly
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
A
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1-31
(blank)
B
Input
2
1-12
(blank)
Day A of every B month(s)
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
C
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
D
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
E
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
The C D of every E month(s)
2
1-12
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Sunday
X
X
X
X
(blank)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Available only when #13 is selected
No end Date
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Default
End By X
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
Calendar Link
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
Select
-
-
-
-
-
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
-
-
-
-
When Outlook Appointment Expires
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Email Server Type
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
Collaboration Settings
-
-
-
Conference Configuration
ACD Accounts
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
UC700/MC550
UC700/MC550
Exchange Server
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin Password
Add New Email Server Link
-
M
-
General Settings
-
X
Edit with cale M
Start Time
History
Client Settings
UC700
Edit with cale O
Start Date
General Settings
Email Servers
X
first
Duration of Recurrence
Calendar Link
Remark
X
Recurring Type
Daily
IMs
-
Default Value
Related
Application
---
Range
O
O
Is
Mandatory
1byte KANA
*#
Special Chars
Select
Input
Input
Method
Parameter
2byte KANA
Number
Alphabet
Start Date
End Date
Button Name
Asia (Other)
View Logs
Australia, Europe
Tab Name
Japan
Application
North America
Group
Sales Regions
Input
M
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Exchange Admin Email
Input
O
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Domain Controller
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Active Directory User
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Active Directory User Password
Input
M
X
X
X
X
255
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Domino Server
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700/MC550
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Z
Z
Z
Z
Input
M
X
X
X
X
Allow clients to search for employees in
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
255
-
Display Home Phone
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Never
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Display Mobile Phone
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Always
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Ping Interval
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
2
1 to 60
10
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Collaboration Support
Select
O
-
Enabled
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server Protocol
Select
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
HTTP
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server URI
Input
O
X
X
X
X
-
-
-
-
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Server Port
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
1025 - 65535
80
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
-
Enabled
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
1025 - 65535
8731
Z
Z
Z
Z
UC700
Z
-
-
-
UC700
US Market Only
Z
-
-
-
UC700
US Market Only
--
-
-
-
-
-
Enable UC700 Conferencing
Select
O
Conferencing Server Port Number
Input
O
X
-
-
-
-
-
5
ACD server name
Select
M
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ACD LogIn
Input
M
X
-
-
-
-
-
-
All Companies
1 - 999999999
X
X*
Z
-
UC700
Supported
Display but supported only for the application described in Related Application
Display only when the application described in Related Application is installed
Not Supported
Appendix C-2
Specifications for OW5000 Admin
Appendix D - 1
Appendix D
OW5000 Administrator
Configuration Specification
Appendix D-1 Configuration Specification
Group
Application
Access Control
Tab Name
SIPUA Group
-
-
-
Group Access
Control
-
-
-
PBX Based Control
-
-
-
Extensions
-
External Numbers
Enable PBXs
Licenses
Platform
Pager Providers
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
-
-
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All
OWAccessServers.
Applied Immediately
Licensed Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
Locations
AreaCode Rules
PBXs
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
-
Enable Extensions
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All
OWAccessServers
Applied Immediately
(except Phone Type and
If these values are
Applied Immediately SIPURL.
modified, wait maximum 30
min or Restart All
OWAccessServers.)
Applied Immediately
-
SIMPLE
Sip Presence
PBX >PBX Dialing
Restart System
-
Wait maximum 60
min or Restart IIS
and OWTelephony
Event Notification
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
Reserved Numbers
Voice Mail Pilot
Numbers
-
-
-
-
Route/Trunks
-
-
-
-
-
Serial Ports
-
-
-
-
-
Voice Mail Servers
-
-
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix D - 2
Group
Applications
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
Application
Tab Name
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
SIMPLE
Sip Presence
Access Server(Local)
-
-
Access Server(REMOTE)
-
-
-
Access Server(PSGW)
-
-
-
Restart OW5000
Application Message
Service
Routing Info
-
-
-
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All OW/
AccessServers
Conference
Manager
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
-
-
-
-
Conference Server
Incoming Call
Assistant
Location Status
Information
OaiServer
Wait maximum 30 min or
Restart All OW/
AccessServers
Redirect
Configurations
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
-
-
-
-
Message Settings
-
-
-
-
PBX Settings
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server Settings
PBX Settings
Restart (OaiServer)
General Settings
-
-
Normalization Rule
-
-
Restart (Remote Call
Control)
Categories
-
-
-
-
-
DIDs
-
-
-
-
-
Locations
-
-
-
-
-
Organizations
-
-
-
-
-
-
Applied Immediately
Remote Call Control
Person
People
Directory
Applied Immediately
-
Role
-
Contact Method
Applied Immediately
Addresses
-
-
-
-
Full Name Format
-
-
-
Positions
-
-
-
-
Specialties
-
-
-
-
Organizations
-
-
-
-
Locations
-
-
-
-
Roles
-
-
-
-
Security
-
-
-
-
-
-
User Privileges
Users
-
Applied Immediately
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
OW5000 API
usCSTA
Call Control API
OW5000 API
LCS/OCS IntegraCall Notifications Information API
tion
API
Appendix D - 3
SIMPLE
Sip Presence
Group
Application
Tab Name
Application Data
-
-
-
-
-
-
Settings
-
General Settings
-
-
-
-
Schedule
-
-
-
-
MA4000
Integration
-
-
-
-
-
-
Version
Information
-
-
-
-
-
-
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
Appendix D - 4
OW5000 Administrator Configuration Specification
UCE Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000) Configuration Guide
NEC NEC Corporation
UC for Enterprise (UCE) Application Platform (UNIVERGE OW5000)
Configuration Guide
NDA-31085 Issue 3
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement